CATALOG '8 5- '8 6
LYCOMING
COLLEGE
Founded 1812
Williamsport, Pennsylvania
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2010 with funding from
Lyrasis Members and Sloan Foundation
http://www.archive.org/details/lycomingcollegec198586lyco
CATALOG '8 5- '8 6
LYCOMING
COLLEGE
Founded 1812
Williamsport, Pennsylvania
Communicating with Lycoming College
Please address specific inquiries as follows:
Director of Admissions
Admissions: requests for publications
Treasurer:
Payment of bills; expenses.
Director of Financial Aid:
Scholarships and loan fund; financial assistance.
Dean of College:
Academic programs; faculty; faculty activities.
Dean of Student Services:
Some activities; residence halls; religious life; health services;
academic support services.
Registrar:
Student records; transcript requests; academic policies.
Career Development Center:
Career counseling; employment opportunities.
Executive Director for College Advancement
Institutional relations; annual fund; gift programs.
Director of Alumni and Parent Relations
Alumni information; parent support
Director of Public Relations
Public information; publications; sports information
All correspondence should be addressed to:
Lycoming College
Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701
The College telephone number is (717) 326-1951.
Visitors
Lycoming welcomes visitors to the campus. If you would like a guided tour, call
the Office of Admissions before your visit to arrange a mutually convenient time.
Lycoming College welcomes applications from prospective students regardless of age. sex. race,
religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color. Lycoming does not discriminate on the
basis of age, sex. race, religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color in the
administration of any of its policies and programs.
Contents
Welcome to Lycoming 3
The Academic Program 5
The Curriculum 21
Student Services 60
Admission 62
Financial Matters 64
The Campus 68
Academic Calendar, 1985-1986 70
Directory 71
The Alumni Association 79
Index 81
The general regulations and policies Muted in this catalog are in affect for the 1985-86 academic year. Students
beginning their first term at Lycoming College in the fall of 1985 or the spnngof 1 986 are thereafter governed by the
policies staled in this catalog Requircnicnls governing a student's major are those in effect at the time a major is
formally declared and officially accepted by the major department.
If changes are made in subsequent editions of the catalog to either general requirements or major requirements,
students may be permitted the option of following their original program or a subsequent catalog version, but the
College always reserves the right to determine which requirements apply.
II a student interrupts his or her education without a leave of absence, the catalog requirements in effect at the time of
readmission will apply Students on an approved leave of absence retain the same requirements they had when they
entered, if their leaves do not extend beyond one year.
Lycoming College reserves the right to amend or change the policies and prcKcdures stated in this catalog without
prior notice to those who may be affected by them. The provisions of this publication are not to be regarded as an
irrevocable contract between the applicant and/or the student and Lycoming College.
Welcome to Lycoming
Lycoming is an independent, coeduca-
tional college dedicated to providing the
type of learning that can be used for a
lifetime — the liberal arts and sciences.
Lycoming's academic relevance
derives from its enduring commitment to
the value of this type of education, as
offered by a superior teaching faculty.
The College's principal aim is to help
students develop a central core of inte-
grated values, skill, information, and
strategies while they learn to communi-
cate, reason, make decisions, under-
stand, and use their imagination. This
type of education can lead to productive
and fulfilling lives in many fields while
allowing lifelong growth and develop-
ment.
Lycoming awards bachelor of arts
degrees in 30 major fields, a bachelor of
fine arts degree in sculpture, and a
bachelor of science degree in nursing.
The curriculum is challenging. Because
it is built upon the two principles of the
liberal arts known as distribution and
concentration, it allows students to study
in breadth and depth.
Students who have special interests
not met entirely by a major field can
design their own majors. Or, if they are
interested in teaching, medicine, law,
dentistry, or the ministry, they can take
courses needed to enter their advanced
study.
Students also can study engineering,
forestry or environmental studies,
podiatric medicine, optometry, medical
technology, and sculpture through
cooperative programs operated by
Lycoming with other colleges and uni-
versities. Or, they can study abroad or in
Harrisburg, Pa., Washington, D.C., or
New York City through other off-
campus study programs.
Most students complete their program
of study in four years, usually by taking
four courses each fall and spring semes-
ter. But students also can take one course
during Lycoming's May term, or two
courses during the summer term.
Recognizing students" concerns about
careers, Lycoming offers extensive
counseling through the Career Develop-
ment Center and advisory committees for
prelaw, prehealth professions, and pre-
medical students. The College also oper-
ates a wide-ranging internship program
that allows students to earn academic
credit while working at area businesses,
government offices, and nonprofit orga-
nizations.
Lycoming's ratio of faculty to students
is 15 to one, which means that most
classes are small and there is abundant
opportunity for individual attention. All
faculty members teach. More than 70
percent of Lycoming's faculty hold the
highest degrees in their fields from the
nation's outstanding colleges and univer-
sities. And. faculty members take their
advising seriously. They care about stu-
dents, and encourage and guide them so
they receive the education they want.
Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's
main campus. Most of them have been
built since 1950. The modem buildings
include the eight residence halls; the
library; the Academic Center, which
houses the Arena Theatre, planetarium,
computer center, and art gallery; the stu-
dent union; the physical education/
recreation center, including a six-lane,
25-yard pool; a completely renovated
fine arts center with excellent facilities to
accommodate sculpture, painting,
drawing, printmaking, ceramics and
photography; and a music building,
which houses individual music practice
rooms and an electronic-music studio.
Lycoming houses approximately 900
of its 1,250 students in the residence
halls, which include double and single
rooms. Most students find the campus
friendly and comfortable, with all of the
buildings easy to reach from anywhere
on campus. Students come from a variety
of economic classes, religious beliefs,
and geographic areas, although most stu-
dents call Pennsylvania, New Jersey, or
New York their home. They work and
play together in an atmosphere of respect
and tolerance.
The College offers a variety of extra-
curricular activities, including an Artist
Series. Student government groups help
to plan campus activities and social
events. Numerous clubs, honor
societies, social fraternities and sorori-
ties, the student newspaper, yearbook
and literary magazine, and the band and
widely acclaimed choir meet other stu-
dent interests. Students who like to per-
form or compete can act on the Arena
Theatre stage or play on intercollegiate
or intramural sports teams. Intercollegi-
ate teams for men include football, soc-
cer, basketball, wrestling, tennis, golf,
swimming, track and field, and cross
country. Intercollegiate teams for
women include basketball, tennis, field
hockey, swimming, track and field, and
cross country.
In addition, students who like hiking,
backpacking, skiing, camping, fishing,
hunting, kayaking, spelunking, and
other outdoor sports will find Lycom-
ing's location ideal.
Lycoming is situated on a slight
prominence near downtown Williams-
port, a small city nestled along the West
Branch of the Susquehanna River in
northcentral Pennsylvania's rolling hills
and valleys. Yet, the College is within a
four-hour drive of metropolitan centers
such as New York City, Philadelphia,
Pittsburgh, Washington. D.C.. Balti-
more. Syracuse, Rochester, and the New
Jersey shore points. The Williamsport-
metro area is home to about 75.000 per-
sons.
Lycoming enjoys a relationship with
The United Methodist Church. It sup-
ports the Methodist tradition of provid-
ing an education for persons of all faiths.
Fully accredited. Lycoming is a mem-
ber of the Middle States Association of
Colleges and Schools, and the University
Senate of The United Methodist Church.
It is a member of the Association of
American Colleges, the Pennsylvania
Association of Colleges and Universi-
ties, the Commission for Independent
Colleges and Universities, the National
Commission on Accrediting, and the
National Association of Schools and
Colleges of The United Methodist
Church.
HISTORY
Lycoming College was founded in 1812
as the Williamsport Academy, an
elementary and secondary school.
Thirty-six years later, the academy
became the Williamsport Dickinson
Seminary under the patronage of The
Methodist Episcopal Church. The semi-
nary operated as a private boarding
school until 1929, when a college curri-
culum was added and it became the Wil-
liamsport Dickinson Seminary and
Junior College. In 1947, the junior col-
lege became a four-year degree-granting
college of liberal arts and sciences. It
adopted the name Lycoming, derived
from the Indian word "lacomic,"
meaning "Great Stream." The word
Lycoming has been common to north-
central Pennsylvania since colonial days.
Academic Program
THE BACHELOR OF
ARTS DEGREE
Lycoming is committed to the principle
that a liberal arts education is the best
hope for an enlightened citizenry. Con-
sequently, the bachelor of arts degree is
conferred upon the student who has com-
pleted an educational program incorpor-
ating the two principles of the liberal arts
known as distribution and concentration.
The objective of the distribution princi-
ple is to insure that the student achieves
breadth in learning through the study of
the major dimensions of human inquiry;
the humanities, the social sciences, and
the natural sciences. The objective of the
concentration principle is to provide
depth of learning through completion of
a program of study in a given discipline
or subject area known as the major.
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE
Every degree candidate is expected to
complete the following requirements in
order to qualify for graduation:
— complete the distribution
program.
— complete a major consisting of at
least eight courses while achieving
a minimum grade point average of
2.0 in those courses.
— earn one year of credit in physical
education. All students must dem
onstrate competence in swimming.
(Medical exemptions may be
granted by the College physician
after an examination and review of
the student's medical history and
family physician's report.)
— pass a minimum of 128 semester
hours (32 unit courses) with a mini-
mum cumulative average of 2.0.
Additional credits beyond 128
semester hours may be completed
provided the minimum 2.0 cumu-
lative average is maintained.
— complete in residence the final
eight courses offered for the degree
at Lycoming.
— satisfy all financial obligations
incurred at the College.
— complete the above requirements
within seven years of continuous
enrollment following the date of
matriculation.
All exemptions or waivers of specific
requirements are made by the Committee
on Academic Standing.
THE BACHELOR OF
FINE ARTS DEGREE
The bachelor of fine arts degree is speci-
fically designed to train professional
artists. The BFA in sculpture is a synthe-
sis of three diverse forms of education: a
studio art program that emphasizes the
skills and concepts of the visual lan-
guage; an apprenticeship that takes tech-
nical expertise as the departure point,
and the scholastic method employed in
both art history and the general-
education component.
REQUIREMENTS FOR
THE BACHELOR OF
FINE ARTS DEGREE
Every BFA degree candidate is expected
to complete the following requirements
in order to qualify for graduation:
— complete the 12-course Art
Department course of study.
— complete the distribution program.
— complete a total of 32 course units
achieving a minimum grade point
average of 2.0 in those courses
taken within the College.
— complete one of the field speciali-
zation apprenticeships at the John-
son Atelier Technical Institute of
Sculpture.
— earn one year of credit in physical
education. All students must dem-
onstrate competence in swimming.
(Medical exemptions may be
granted by the College physician
after an examination and review of
the student's medical history and
family physician's report.)
— complete in residence the final
eight courses offered for the degree
at Lycoming.
— satisfy all financial obligations
incurred at the College.
— have a public exhibition of original
art work and make an oral defense.
THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
IN NURSING DEGREE
The program of study leading to the
bachelor of science in nursing degree is
designed to prepare men and women as
beginning practitioners of professional
nursing, qualified for first-level posi-
tions in a variety of health settings or for
graduate study in nursing. Upon satis-
factory completion of the program, a
graduate is eligible to write the State
Board of Nursing examination for licen-
sure as a registered nurse. The goal of the
program is to develop a liberally edu-
cated and self-directed individual who is
prepared to contribute to the welfare of
the nation through the practice of profes-
sional nursing which supports the prom-
otion and restoration of health of indivi-
duals and families in a variety of settings.
REQUIREMENTS FOR
THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
IN NURSING DEGREE
Every BSN degree candidate is expected
to complete the following requirements
in order to qualify for graduation:
— complete the 13-course major with
a minimum cumulative average of
2.0, including the required May
term following the junior year.
— complete the distribution require-
ment as modified for the BSN
degree.
— complete a minimum of 128
semester hours (32 units) with a
minimum cumulative average of
2.0.
— earn one year of credit in physical
education. All students must dem-
onstrate competence in swimming.
(Medical exemptions may be
granted by the College physican
after an examination and review of
the student's medical history and
family physician's report.)
— complete in residence the final
eight courses offered for the degree
at Lycoming.
— satisfy all financial obligations
incurred at the College.
— complete the degree requirements
within a five-year period after
admission to the nursing major.
Candidates who are unable to meet
this requirement must petition for
an extension.
THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM
A course can be used to satisfy only one
distribution requirement. Courses for
which a grade of "S" is recorded may
not be used toward the fulfillment of the
distribution requirements. (Refer to page
10 for an explanation of the grading
system. ) A course in any of the following
distribution requirements refers to a
full-unit (four semester hours) course
taken at Lycoming, any appropriate
combination of fractional unit courses
taken at Lycoming which accumulate to
four semester hours, or any single course
of three or more semester hours trans-
ferred from another institution. For the
BSN degree, see special modified distri-
bution requirements as listed below.
English — All students are required to
pass English 6 and one other English
course, excluding English 3 and 5.
English 6 should be taken during the
freshman year and must be taken no later
than the second semester (usually the
spring semester) of the sophomore year.
In addition, all students who have not
been exempted from English 5 must
receive a mark of "Satisfactory" in
English 5 before being permitted to
enroll in English 6. Students are placed
in English 5 or 6 on the basis of their
performance on the Achievement
Examination in English Composition.
English 3 may not be used to satisfy the
distribution requirement in English.
Foreign Language or Mathematics
— Students are required to meet a mini-
mum basic requirement in either a fore-
ign language or the mathematical sci-
ences.
Foreign Language. Students may
choose from among French, German,
Greek, Hebrew, or Spanish and are
required to pass two courses on the inter-
mediate or higher course level. Place-
ment at the appropriate course level will
be determined by the faculty of the
Department of Foreign Languages and
Literatures. Students who have com-
pleted two or more years of a given
language in high school are not admitted
for credit to the elementary course in the
same foreign language except by written
permission of the chairman of the depart-
ment. French 28 and Spanish 32 will
meet part of this requirement only if the
section taught in the language is com-
pleted.
Mathematics. Students are required to
demonstrate competence in basic algebra
and to pass three units of mathematical
science other than Mathematics 5. Com-
petence in basic algebra may be demon-
strated either by passing the basic algebra
section of the Mathematics Placement
Examination or by passing Mathematics
5. By demonstrating higher competence
on the Mathematics Placement Exami-
nation, students may reduce the require-
ment to two units of mathematical sci-
ence. No more than one unit may be
taken in computer science.
Religion or Philosophy — Students
are required to pass two courses in either
religion or philosophy. Any two religion
courses may be used to fulfill the
philosophy/religion distribution require-
ment, with this exception: only one
course from the combination Religion
20-21 may be selected for distribution.
Fine Arts — Students are required to
pass two courses as indicated in art,
literature, music, or theatre.
Art. Any two courses.
Literature. Any two literature courses
selected from the offerings of the Depart-
ments of English and Foreign Languages
and Literatures (French, German, or
Spanish).
Music. Any combination of music
offerings totaling the equivalent of eight
semester hours, for example:
— a course or courses from
those numbered Music 10 through
Music 46.
— applied music (private lessons)
and/or ensemble (orchestra, choir,
band) earned fractionally as fol-
lows:
(1) for private lessons (Music 60
through 66) a one-half hour les-
son per week earns one-half
hour of credit; a one-hour lesson
earns one hour of credit. Note:
There are extra fees for these
lessons. (For details see Depart-
ment of Music course offerings
described elsewhere in this
catalog.)
(2) credit may be earned for partici-
pation in the Williamsport Sym-
phony Orchestra (Music 67),
the College choir (Music 68)
and/or band (Music 69); howev-
er, a student may earn no more
than one hour each semester
even though participating in
orchestra, choir, and/or band.
(For further details, please see
the Department of Music offer-
ings elsewhere in this catalog.)
Theatre. The fine arts distribution
requirement may be satisfied by select-
ing any two of the following recom-
mended courses: Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18,
32, 33, or other courses with the consent
of the instructor.
Natural Science — Students are
required to pass any two courses in one of
the following disciplines: astronomy and
physics, biology, or chemistry.
History and Social Science — Stu-
dents are required to pass two courses as
indicated in economics, history, political
science, psychology, or sociology/
anthropology.
Economics. Any two courses.
History. Any two courses, except
History 31.
Political Science. Any two courses.
Psychology. Psychology 10 and one
other course.
Sociology /Anthropology. Sociology/
Anthropololgy 10 plus another course.
THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM
FOR THE BSN DEGREE
English — standard require-
ment as shown above.
Mathematical Sciences — compe-
tence in basic algebra as demon-
strated by completion of, or
exemption from Math 5; Mathe-
matics 13; and Computer Science
15
Religion and Philosophy — Religion
20 and Philosophy 19
Fine Arts/Foreign Language — two
courses from one department as
follows:
Art — any two (2) courses
Literature — any two literature
courses selected from the depart-
ments of English and Foreign
Languages and Literatures
Music — any combination of eight
(8) credits, including applied
music, ensemble, and music
department courses
Theatre — any two (2) courses from
among Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18.
32, 33, or other courses with the
consent of the instructor.
Language — any two (2) courses at
the intermediate or higher level.
No student who has had two or
more years of a given foreign
language in high school shall be
admitted to the elementary
courses in that same language for
credit, except by written permis-
sion of the chairman of the
department.
Natural Science — Chemistry 8, 15
Social Science — Psychology 10 and
17; Sociology and Anthropology
— one from among Soc 10, 14,20,
28, and 29.
Physical Education — standard
requirement as shown on page 5.
THE MAJOR
Students are required to complete a series
of courses in one departmental or inter-
disciplinary (established or individual)
major. Specific course requirements for
each major offered by the College are
listed in the curriculum section of this
catalog. Students must earn a 2.0 or
higher grade-point average in those
courses stipulated as comprising the
major. (This requirement is not met by
averaging the grades for all courses com-
pleted in the major department.) Stu-
dents must declare a major by the begin-
ning of their junior year. Departmental
and established interdisciplinary majors
are declared in the Office of the Regi-
strar, whereas individual interdisciplin-
ary majors must be approved by the
Committee on Curriculum Develop-
ment. Students may complete more than
one major, each of which will be
recorded on the transcript. Students may
be removed from major status if they are
not making satisfactory progress in the
major. This action is taken by the Dean
of the College upon the recommendation
of the department, coordinating com-
mittee (for established interdisciplinary
majors), or Curriculum Development
Committee (for individual interdisciplin-
ary majors). The decision of the Dean of
the College may be appealed to the
Academic Standing Committee by the
student involved or the recommending
department or committee.
Departmental Majors — Departmental
majors are available in the following
areas:
Accounting
Art
Astronomy
Biology
Business Administration
Chemistry
Computer Science
Economics
English
Foreign Languages and Literatures
French, German, Spanish
History
Mathematics
Music
Nursing
Philosophy
Physics
Political Science
Psychology
Religion
Sociology/ Anthropology
Theatre
Established Interdisciplinary Majors
— The following established interdis-
ciplinary majors include course work in
two or more departments:
Accounting-Mathematical Sciences
American Studies
Criminal Justice
International Studies
Literature
Mass Communication
Near East Culture and Archaeology
Individual Interdisciplinary Majors
— Students may design a major that is
unique to their needs and objectives and
which combines course work in more
than one department. This major is
developed in consultation with the stu-
dent's faculty adviser and with a panel of
faculty members from each of the spon-
soring departments. The application is
acted upon by the Curriculum Develop-
ment Committee. The major normally
consists of 10 courses beyond those
taken to satisfy the distribution require-
ments. Students are expected to com-
plete at least six courses at the junior or
senior level. Examples of individual
interdisciplinary majors are Racial and
Cultural Minorities, Illustration in the
Print Medium, Environmental Law,
Advertising, Art/History, Art/Business,
Human Behavior, and Images of Man.
Major in Sculpture Leading to Bache-
lor of Fine Arts Degree — Through a
cooperative program with the Johnson
Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture,
Princeton, New Jersey, students may
earn a BFA degree in sculpture. The
major consists of a core academic pro-
gram, a course of study in art, elective
courses, and an apprenticeship at the
Johnson Atelier.
THE MINOR
The College awards two kinds of minors,
departmental and interdisciplinary, in
recognition of concentrated course work
in an area other than the student's major.
All minors are subject to the following
limitations:
— a minor must include at leasl
two courses which are not counted
in the student's major.
— a student may receive at most two
minors.
— students with two majors may
receive only one minor; students
with three majors may not receive a
minor.
— students may not receive a minor in
their major discipline unless their
major discipline is Art and the
minor is Art History. (A discipline
is any course of study in which a
student can major. Tracks within
majors are not separate discip-
lines.)
— a student may not receive a minor
unless his average in the courses
which count for his minor is a mini-
mum of 2.00.
— courses taken S/U may not be
counted toward a minor.
Students must declare their intention to
minor by signing a form available in the
Registrar's Office, getting required
faculty signatures, and returning the
completed form to the Records Room.
When students complete a minor, the
title will be indicated on their official
transcript. Students must meet the
requirements for the minor which are in
effect at the time they declare a minor or
which are in effect subsequent to that
time and before they graduate.
Departmental Minors — Require-
ments for a departmental minor vary
from department to department. Students
interested in pursuing a departmental
minor should consult that department for
its policy regarding minors.
Departmental minors are available in
the following areas:
ACCOUNTING
Financial Accounting
Managerial Accounting
Federal Income Tax
ART
Art History
Sculpture
Painting
BIOLOGY
CHEMISTRY
ECONOMICS
ENGLISH
English Literature
Writing
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND
LITERATURES
French
German
Spanish
HISTORY
American History
European History
History
MASS COMMUNICATION
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
Computer Science
Mathematics
PHILOSOPHY
Philosophy
Philosophy and Law
Philosophy and Science
The History of Philosophy
POLITICAL SCIENCE
Political Science
Foreign Affairs
Legal Studies
PSYCHOLOGY
RELIGION
SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY
Sociological & Anthropological
Views of Religion
THEATRE
Theatre History & Literature
Performance
Technical Theatre
Interdisciplinary Minors — Interdis-
ciplinary minors include coursework in
two or more departments. Students inter-
ested in interdisciplinary minors should
consult the faculty coordinator of that
minor. An interdisciplinary minor is
available in the following area: BIBLI-
CAL LANGUAGES.
ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT
One advantage of a small college is the
rich experience gained by the close asso-
ciation of students and faculty. The
advisement program at Lycoming
enables students to discuss academic and
other problems as well as opportunities
with faculty advisers, instructors, and
the staffs of the Dean of the College and
the Dean of Student Services.
During the summer orientation, fresh-
men are assigned a faculty adviser who is
prepared to assist new students with the
challenges of an unfamiliar social and
academic environment. All students are
required to have a faculty adviser. When
students have declared a major, they are
then assigned an adviser from within the
major department or program.
Although the advisement program is
an important part of the Lycoming
academic experience, students are
expected to accept full responsibility for
their academic programs, including
satisfactory completion of program and
College-wide requirements.
Special advising for selected profes-
sions is provided by the health, legal, and
theological professions advisory com-
mittees. Students interested in these pro-
fessions should register with the appro-
priate committee during their first
semester of enrollment at Lycoming or
immediately after they decide to enter
these professions.
Preparation for Health Professions
— The program of pre-professional edu-
cation for the health professions (allo-
pathic, dental, osteopathic, podiatric and
veterinary medicine, optometry, and
pharmacy) is organized around a sound
foundation in biology, chemistry,
mathematics, and physics and a wide
range of subject matter from the humani-
ties, social sciences, and fine arts. At
least three years of undergraduate study
is recommended before entry into a pro-
fessional school; the normal procedure is
to complete the bachelor of arts degree.
Students interested in one of the health
professions or in an allied health career
should make their intentions known to
the admissions office when applying and
to the Health Professions Advisory Com-
mittee (HPAC) during their first semes-
ter. The committee advises students con-
cerning preparation for and application
to health-professions schools. All pre-
health professions students are invited to
join the student Pre-Health Professions
Association. (See also descriptions of the
nursing program and of the cooperative
programs in podiatric medicine,
optometry, and medical technology.)
Preparation for Legal Professions
— Lycoming offers a strong academic
preparation for students interested in law
as a profession. Admission to law school
is not predicated upon a particular major
or area of study; rather, a student is
encouraged to design a course of study
(traditional or interdisciplinary major)
which is of personal interest and signifi-
cance. While no specific major is recom-
mended, there are certain skills of parti-
cular relevance to the pre-law student:
clear writing, analytical thinking, and
language comprehension. These skills
should be developed during the under-
graduate years.
Pre-law students should register with
the Legal Professions Advisory Com
mittee (LPAC) upon entering Lycoming
and should join the Pre-Law Society on
campus. LPAC assists the pre-law stu-
dent through advisement, compilation of
recommendations, and dissemination of
information and materials about law and
the legal profession. It sponsors Pre-
LSAT workshops to help prepare stu-
dents for the law boards. The Pre-Law
Society has sponsored films, speakers,
and field trips, including visits to law
school campuses.
Preparation for Theological Profes-
sions — The Theological Professions
Advisory Commiteee (TPAC) acts as a
"center" for students, faculty, and cler-
gy to discuss the needs of students who
want to prepare themselves for the mini-
stry, religious education, advanced
training in religion, or related vocations.
Also, it may help coordinate internships
for students who desire practical experi-
ence in the parish ministry or related
areas. Upon entering Lycoming, stu-
dents should register with TPAC if they
plan to investigate the religious voca-
tions.
In general, students preparing to
attend a theological seminary should
examine the suggestions set down by the
Association of Theological Schools
(available from TPAC). Recommended
is a broad program in the liberal arts, a
major in one of the humanities (English,
history, languages, literature, philoso-
phy, religion) or one of the social sci-
ences (American studies, criminal jus-
tice, economics, international studies,
political science, psychology,
sociology-anthropology), and a variety
of electives. Students preparing for a
career in religious education should
major in religion and elect five or six
courses in psychology, education, and
sociology. This program of study will
qualify students to work as an education-
al assistant or a director of religious edu-
cation after graduate study in a theologi-
cal seminary.
REGISTRATION
During the registration period, students
select their courses for the next semester
and register their course selections in the
Office of the Registrar. Course selection
is made in consultation with the student's
faculty advisor in order to insure that the
course schedule is consistent with Col-
lege requirements and student goals.
After the registration period, any change
in the student's course schedule must be
approved by both the faculty advisor and
Office of the Registrar. Students may not
receive credit for courses in which they
are not formally registered.
During the first five days of classes,
students may drop any course without
any record of such enrollment appearing
on the permanent record, and they may
add any course that is not closed. Stu-
dents wishing to drop a course between
the fifth day and the 1 2th week of classes
must secure a withdrawal form from the
Office of the Registrar, which is pre-
sented to the instructor of the course in
question, who assigns a withdrawal
grade based on the level of the student's
performance from the beginning of the
course to the date of withdrawal. With-
drawal grades are not computed in the
grade point average. Students may not
withdraw from courses after the 12th
week of a semester and the comparable
period during the May and summer
terms.
In two-credit ( '/: unit) courses meeting
only during the last half of any semester,
students may drop/add for a period of
five days, effective with the mid-term
date shown on the academic calendar.
Withdrawal from half-semester courses
with a withdrawal grade may occur
within six weeks of the beginning of the
course. It is understood that the period of
time at the beginning of the semester and
at the mid-point of the semester will be
identical; for example, a period of five
days as indicated above.
THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM
Instruction at Lycoming College is
organized, with few exceptions, on a
departmental basis. Most courses are
unit courses, meaning that each course
taken is considered to be equivalent to
four semester hours of credit. Exceptions
occur in applied music courses, which
are offered for either one-half of one
semester hour of credit, and in depart-
ments that have elected to offer certain
courses for the equivalent of two semes-
ter hours of credit. Further, independent
studies and internships carrying two
semester hours of credit may be
designed. The normal student course
load is four courses during the fall and
spring semesters. Students who elect to
attend the special sessions may enroll in
one course during the May term and one
or two courses in the summer term. A
student is considered full time when
enrolled for a minimum of three courses
during the fall or spring semesters, one
course for the May term, and two courses
for the summer term. Students may
enroll in five courses during the fall and
spring semesters if they are Lycoming
Scholars or were admitted to the Dean's
List at the end of the previous semester.
Exceptions may be granted by the Dean
of the College. Overloads are not per-
mitted during the May and summer
terms.
THE SYSTEM OF GRADING
AND REPORTING OF GRADES
The evaluation of student performance in
credit courses is indicated by the use of
traditional letter symbols. These sym-
bols and their definitions are as follows:
A Excellent — Signifies superior
achievement through mastery of content
or skills and demonstration of creative
and independent thinking.
B High Pass — Signifies better-than-
average achievement wherein the student
reveals insight and understanding.
C Pass — Signifies satisfactory
achievement wherein the student's work
has been of average quality and quantity.
The student has demonstrated basic com-
petence in the subject area and may
enroll in additional course work.
D Low Pass — Signifies unsatisfactory
achievement wherein the student met
only the minimum requirements for
passing the course and should not con-
tinue in the subject area without depart-
mental advice.
F Failing — Signifies that the student
has not met the minimum requirements
for passing the course.
1 Incomplete Work — Assigned in
accordance with the restrictions of
established academic policy.
R A Repeated Course — Students shall
have the option of repeating courses for
which they already have received a pass-
ing grade in addition to those which they
have failed. No credit is received for the
second attempt. Grades will be aver-
aged.
S Passing Work, no grade assigned —
Converted from traditional grade of F.
U Failing work, no grade assigned —
converted from traditional grade of F.
X Audit — Work as an auditor for which
no credit is earned.
W Withdrawal — Signifies withdrawal
from the course early in the term when it
cannot be determined that the student is
passing or failing.
WP Withdrawal, passing — The stu-
dent was passing at the time of withdraw-
al; no credit is earned.
WF Withdrawal, failing — The student
was failing at the time of withdrawal; no
credit is earned.
The cumulative grade point average
(GPA) is calculated by multiplying qual-
ity points by credits and dividing the total
quality points by the total credits. A
quality point is the unit of measurement
of the quality of work done by the stu-
dent.
Quality Points
Earned
Grade
for each semester
hour
A Excellent
4
B High Pass
3
C Pass
2
D Low Pass
1
F Failing
0
The grade point average for the major
is calculated in the same manner for the
courses required for the major.
A minimum of 2.00 is required for the
cumulative grade point average and for
the grade point average in the major to
meet the requirements for graduation.
You cannot compute your cumulative
GPA by averaging your semester GPA' s .
Use of the satisfactory/unsatisfactory
grading option is limited as follows (this
does not apply to Education 5 and Engl-
ish 5):
— students may enroll on an
S/U basis in no more than one
course per semester and no more
than four courses during the under-
graduate career.
— S/U courses completed after decla-
ration of the major may not be used
to satisfy a requirement of that
major, including courses required
by the major department which are
offered by other departments.
(Instructor-designated courses are
excepted from this limitation.)
— courses for which a grade of S is
recorded may not be used toward
fulfillment of any distribution
requirement.
- students may not enroll in English
6 on an S/U basis.
- a course selected on an S/U basis
which is subsequently withdrawn
will not count toward the four-
course limit.
- instructor-designated courses may
be offered during the May term
with the approval of the Dean of
the College. Such courses are not
counted toward the four-course
limit.
- S/U grades are not computed in the
grade point average.
- students electing the S/U option
may designate a minimum accep-
tance letter grade of A or B. If the
letter grade actually earned by the
student equals or exceeds this mini-
mum, that letter grade is entered on
the student's permanent record and
is computed in the grade point
average. In such a case, the course
does not count toward the four-
course limit. If the student does not
indicate a minimum acceptable
letter grade or if the letter grade
actually earned is lower than the
minimum designated by the stu-
dent, the Registrar substitutes an S
for any passing grade (A, B, C, or
D) and a U for an F grade.
- students receiving either an S or U
grade are not eligible for the
Dean's List for that semester.
- students must declare the S/U
option before the end of the period
during which courses may be
added during any given semester,
half-semester, or term.
- instructors are not notified which
of their students are enrolled on an
S/U basis.
- students electing the S/U option are
expected to perform the same work
as tho.se enrolled on a regular basis.
Incomplete grades may be given
if, for absolutely unavoidable rea-
sons (usually medical in nature),
the student has not been able to
complete the work requisite to the
course. An incomplete grade must
10
be removed within six weeks of the
next regular semester.
Students shall have the option of
repeating courses for which they
already have received a passing
grade in addition to those which
they have failed. Recording of
grades for all repeated courses shall
be governed by the following con-
ditions:
— a course may be repeated
only one time.
— both attempts will be recorded on
the student's transcript.
— credit for the course will be given
only once.
— for the purpose of determining the
student's GPA, the average grade
received for the two attempts will
be used as if it were the grade for a
single course.
— a repeated course will be counted
toward the total number of unsuc-
cessful attempts.
ATTENDANCE
The academic program at Lycoming is
based upon the assumption that there is
value in class attendance for all students.
Individual instructors have the preroga-
tive of establishing reasonable absence
regulations in any course. The student is
responsible for learning and observing
these regulations.
STUDENT RECORDS
The policy regarding student educational
records is designed to protect the privacy
of students against unwarranted intru-
sions and is consistent with Section 438
of the General Education Provision Act
(commonly known as the Family Educa-
tional Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, as
amended). The details of the College
policy on student records and the proce-
dures for gaining access to student
records are contained in the current issue
of The Pathfinder, which is available in
the library and the Office of the Dean of
the College.
ACADEMIC STANDING AND
ACADEMIC HONESTY
Students will be placed on academic
probation if either the number of hours
completed or cumulative grade point
average falls below the following stan-
dards:
Semester Hours Cumulative
(Full-time) Completed GPA
1 12 1.66
2 24 1.85
3 40 1 .90
4 56 2.00
5 72 2.00
6 88 2.00
7 104 2.00
8 120 2.00
In order to meet graduation require-
ments, students must complete 128 cre-
dit hours. Students who are enrolled part
time or for fewer than the normal four
courses per term will be expected to
complete an equivalent proportion of
their program each semester.
Students will be subject to suspension
from the College if they:
— are on probation for two con-
secutive semesters;
— achieve a grade point average of
1.00 or below during any one
semester.
Students will be subject to dismissal
from the College if they:
— can not resonably complete all
requirements for a degree;
— exceed 24 semester hours of unsuc-
cessful course attempts (grades of
F, U, W, -WP, WF, and R) except
in the case of withdrawal for medi-
cal or psychological reasons.
The integrity of the academic process of
the College requires honesty in all phases
of the instructional program. The Col-
lege assumes that students are committed
to the principle of academic honesty.
Students who fail to honor this commit-
ment are subject to dismissal. Procedural
guidelines and rules for the adjudication
of cases of academic dishonesty are
printed in The Faculty Handbook and
The Pathfinder (the student academic
handbook ) . copies of which are available
in the library.
CREDIT BY EXAMINATION
Advanced Placement — Entering fresh-
men who have completed an advanced
course while in secondary school and
who have taken the appropriate
advanced-placement examination of the
College Entrance Examination Board
(CEEB) are encouraged to apply for cre-
dit and advanced placement at the time of
admission. A grade of three or above is
considered satisfactory. Students should
inform the Registrar's Office and their
academic advisor immediately when
advanced placement examinations have
been taken.
College Level Examination Pro-
gram (CLEP) — Students may earn
college credit for superior achievement
through CLEP. By achieving at the 75th
percentile or above on the General
Examinations and the 65th percentile or
above on approved Subject Examina-
tions, students may earn up to 50 percent
of the course requirements for a bachelor
of arts degree. Although these examina-
tions may be taken after enrollment, new
students who are competent in a given
area are encouraged to take the examina-
tion of their choice during the second
semester of their senior year so that
Lycoming will have the test scores avail-
able for registration advisement for the
first semester of enrollment. Further
information about CLEP may be
obtained through the secondary-school
guidance office or the Office of Admis-
sions at Lycoming College. Students
should inform the Registrar's Office and
their academic advisor immediately
when CLEP examinations have been
taken.
ACADEMIC HONORS
Dean's List — Students are admitted to
the Dean's List at the end of the fall and
11
spring semesters if they have completed
at least 15 credits with other than S/U or
R grades, and have a minimum grade
point average of 3.50 for the semester.
Graduation Honors — Students are
awarded the bachelor of arts degree, the
bachelor of fine arts degree, or the
bachelor of science in nursing degree
with honors when they have earned the
following grade point averages based on
all courses attempted at Lycoming, with
a minimum of 64 credits (16 units)
required for a student to be eligible for
honors:
summa cum laude 3.90-4.00
magna cum laude 3.50-3.89
cum laude 3.25-3.49
Academic Honor Awards, Prizes,
and Societies — Superior academic
achievement is recognized through the
conferring of awards and prizes at the
annual Honors Day convocation and
Commencement and through election to
membership in honor societies.
Societies
Blue Key Freshmen Men
Gold Key Freshmen Women
Beta Beta Beta Biology
Omicron Delta Epsilon.. Economics
Phi Alpha Theta History
Phi Sigma Tau Philosophy
Sigma Pi Sigma Physics
Pi Sigma Alpha.... Political Science
Psi Chi Psychology
Pi Gamma Mu Social Science
Phi Kappa Phi ... General Academic
Prizes and Awards
American Chemical Society Award —
The award, sponsored by the Susquehan-
na Valley Chapter of the society, is given
to the outstanding senior in chemistry
who plans to enter the profession.
Accounting Society Service Award —
The award is given for outstanding ser-
vice to the Lycoming College Account-
ing Society.
American Institute of Chemists Prize —
The prize, given by the Philadelphia sec-
tion of the institute, goes to the senior
major for excellence in chemistry.
Byron C. Brunstetter Science Award —
The award is given for outstanding
achievement in chemical and biological
sciences.
CRC Press Chemistry Achievement
Award — The award is given to the
freshman who has exhibited outstanding
academic achievement in chemistry.
Chieftain Award — The College's most
prestigious award is given to the senior
who has contributed most to Lycoming
through support of school activities; who
has exhibited outstanding leadership
qualities; who has worked effectively
with other members of the College com-
munity; who has evidenced a good moral
code; and whose academic rank is above
the median for the preceding senior
class.
Civic Choir Award — The award is given
to the College choir member who has
outstanding musical ability and who has
made significant leadership contribu-
tions to the choir.
Class of 1907 Prize — The prize is given
to the senior who has been oustanding in
the promotion of College spirit through
participation in athletics and other activ-
ities.
Benjamin C. Conner Prize — The prize
is given to the graduating student who
has done outstanding work in mathema-
tics.
Durkheim Award — The award is given
to the senior sociology/anthropology
major who has done outstanding work in
the field.
Bishop William Perry Eveland Prize —
The prize is given to the senior who has
shown progress in scholarship, loyalty,
.school spirit, and participation in school
activities.
Excellence in Two-Dimensional Art
Award — The award is given to the
outstanding senior art major in this field.
Excellence in Three-Dimensional Art
Award — The award is given to the
outstanding senior art major in this field.
Excellence in Theatre Performance
Award — The award is given to the
student who has been outstanding as a
performer in the Arena Theatre.
Excellence in Technical Theatre Award
— The award is given to the student who
has been outstanding as a technician for
the Arena Theatre.
Excellence in Political Science Award —
The award goes to the senior political
science major who has performed with
excellence.
J. W. Ferree Award — Given in memory
of the first mathematics professor at
Lycoming's forerunner, the Dickinson
Seminary, the award goes to the student
most active in mathematical sciences.
Faculty Prize — The prize is given to the
commuting student with satisfactory
scholarship and who has been outstand-
ing in promotion of school spirit through
participation in school activities.
Durani L. Furey HI Memorial Prize —
The prize is given to the senior account-
ing major who has shown outstanding
achievement in accounting.
Gillette Foreign Language Prizes — The
prizes are given to the French, German,
and Spanish majors who have achieved
excellence in foreign languages.
John P. Graham Award — Named in
honor of a professor emeritus, the award
is given to the senior English major who
achieves the highest average in English.
Edward J. Gray Prizes — The prizes are
given to the graduating students with the
highest and second highest averages.
Dan Gustafson Award — In memory of a
former member of the English Depart-
ment, the award is given to the senior
12
English major whose analytical writing
demonstrates the highest standards of
literary and critical excellence.
IRUSKA Awards — The awards denote
membership in the society for juniors
who are very active on campus.
Junior Book Award — The award is
given to the outstanding junior political
science major.
Elisha Benson Kline Prize — The prize is
given to the senior mathematics major
with outstanding achievement in the
field.
Charles J. Kocian Awards — The
awards are given to the accounting, busi-
ness administration, and economics
majors who show the greatest proficien-
cy in statistics; the mathematics major
who shows the greatest proficiency in
applied mathematics; the graduating
senior who shows the greatest proficien-
cy in computer science and operations
research; the graduating senior, business
administration major, with highest grade
point average and the graduating senior
with highest average in the class.
Don Lincoln Larrabee Law Prize — The
prize is given to the graduating student
who has shown outstanding scholarship
in legal principles.
C Daniel and Jeanne Little Award —
Presented in memory of two Lycoming
alumni, the award is given to the out-
standing student in public administra-
tion.
The Makisu Award — The award is given
for outstanding service to the college
community, for dedication above and
beyond the realm of one's obligations to
the College.
John C. McCune Memorial Prizes —
The prizes are given to the senior majors
in mathematics, biology, chemistry,
physics, philosophy, and psychology
who have attained the highest averages.
Ethel McDonald Pax Christi Award —
The award is given for outstanding but
quiet consistency in the life of faith and
the practice of Christianity, noteworthy
personal integrity and humble loving
compassion expressed in daily life.
WalterG. Mclver Award — Named after
Lycoming's former choir director, the
award is given to the choir member who
has made outstanding campus contribu-
tions outside of choir.
Pennsylvania Institute of Certified Pub-
lic Accountants Award — The award is
given to the senior accounting major who
has demonstrated high scholastic stand-
ing and qualities of leadership.
Pocahontas Award — The award is
given to Lycoming's outstanding female
athlete.
Psi Chi Sen'ice Award — The award is
given for contributions to the Psychology
Department.
Research and Writing Prize in History —
The prize is given to the student who
does the best work in History 45.
Mar)- L. Russell Award — Named in
honor of a professor emeritus of music,
the award is given for outstanding musi-
cal achievement.
Sadler Prize — The prize is given to the
student with the highest achievement in
calculus, foundations of mathematics,
algebra, and analysis.
Senior Management Award — The
award is given to the senior business
major with the best senior project in
Business Administration 41.
Senior Scholarship Prize in History —
The prize is given to the senior major
with the highest average.
Service to Lycoming Award — Spon-
sored by the Office of Student Services,
the award is given to students who have
made outstanding contributions to
Lycoming.
Frances K. Skeath Award — The award
is given to the senior with outstanding
achievement in mathematics.
J. Milton Skeath Award — The award is
given for superior undergraduate
achievement and potential for further
work in psychology.
John A. Streeter Memorial Award in
Economics — The award is given to the
graduating student with outstanding
achievement in economics.
Tomahawk Award — The award is given
to Lycoming's outstanding male athlete.
Trask Chemistry Prize — The prize is
given to the senior chemistry major who
has done outstanding work in the field.
Wall Street Journal Awards — Two
awards are given. One is given to the
senior business major for excellence in
the field and service to the College com-
munity. A second award is given for
excellence in economics.
Sol "Woody" Wolf Award — The award
is given to the junior athlete who has
shown the most improvement.
Women of Lycoming Scholarship — The
scholarship is given to the junior woman
student who has shown satisfactory
scholarship, outstanding school spirit,
and who is active in campus activities.
Departmental Honors — Honors pro-
jects are normally undertaken only in a
student's major, and are available only to
exceptionally well-qualified students
who have a solid background in the area
of the project and are capable of consid-
erable self-direction. The prerequisites
for registration in an honors program are
as follows:
— a faculty member from the
department(s) in which the honors
project is to be undertaken must
agree to be the director and must
secure departmental approval of
the project.
— the director, in consultation with
13
the student, must convene a com-
mittee consisting of two faculty
members from the department in
which the project is to be underta-
ken, one of whom is the director of
the project, and one faculty mem-
ber from each of two other depart-
ments related to the subject matter
of the study.
— the honors committee must then
certify by their signatures on the
application that the project in
question is academically legitimate
and worthy of pursuit as an honors
project, and that the student in
question is qualified to pursue the
project.
— the project must be approved by the
Committee on Individual Studies.
Students successfully complete hon-
ors projects by satisfying the following
conditions in accordance with guide-
lines established by the Committee on
Individual Studies:
— the student must produce a sub-
stantial research paper, critical
study, or creative project. If the
end product is a creative project, a
critical paper analyzing the tech-
niques and principles employed
and the nature of the achievement
represented in the project shall be
submitted.
— the student must successfully
explain and defend the work in a
final oral examination given by the
honors committee.
— the honors committee must certify
that the student has successfully
defended the project, and that the
student's achievement is clearly
superior to that which would ordi-
narily by required to earn a grade of
"A" in a regular independent-
studies course.
— the Committee on Individual Stu-
dies must certify that the student
has satisfied all of the conditions
mentioned above.
Except in unusual circumstances, honors
projects are expected to involve indepen-
dent studv in two consecutive unit
courses. Successful completion of the
honors project will cause the designation
of honors in that department to be placed
upon the permanent record. Acceptable
theses are deposited in the College
library. In the event that the study is not
completed successfully or is not deemed
worthy of honors, the student shall be
re-registered in independent studies and
given a final grade for the course.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Independent Studies — Independent
studies are available to any qualified
student who wishes to engage in and
receive academic credit for any academi-
cally legitimate course of study for which
he or she could not otherwise receive
credit. It may be pursued at any level
(introductory, intermediate, or
advanced) and in any department,
whether or not the student is a major in
that department. Studies projects which
duplicate catalog courses are sometimes
possible, and are subject to the same
provisions which apply to all studies
projects. In order for a student to be
registered in an independent-study
course, the following conditions must be
satisfied;
— an appropriate member of the
faculty must agree to supervise the
project and must certify by signing
the application form that the pro-
ject is academically legitimate and
involves an amount of work appro-
priate for the amount of academic
credit requested, and that the stu-
dent in question is qualified to
pursue the project.
— the studies project must be
approved by the chairman of the
department in which the studies
project is to be undertaken.
— after the project is approved by the
instructor and by the chairman of
the appropriate department, the
studies project must be approved
by the Committee on Individual
Studies.
In addition, participation in
independent-studies projects, with the
exception of those which duplicate cata-
log courses, is subject to the following:
— students may not engage in more
than one independent-studies pro-
ject during any given semester.
— students may not engage in more
than two independent-studies pro-
jects during their academic careers
at Lycoming College.
As with other academic policies, any
exceptions to these two rules must be
approved by the Academic Standing
Committee.
Internship Program — An internship is
a course jointly sponsored by the College
and a public or private agency or subdivi-
sion of the College in which a student is
enabled to earn college credit by partici-
pating in some active capacity as an
assistant, aide, or apprentice. At least
one-half of the effort expended by the
intern should consist of academic work
related to agency situations. The objec-
tives of the internship program are ( 1 ) to
further the development of a central core
of values, awarenesses, strategies,
skills, and information through experi-
ences outside the classroom or other
campus situations, and (2) to facilitate
the integration of theory and practice by
encouraging students to relate their on-
campus academic experiences more
directly to society in general and to possi-
ble career and other post-baccalaureate
objectives in particular.
Any junior or senior student in good
academic standing may petition the
Committee on Individual Studies for
approval to serve as an intern. A maxi-
mum of 16 credits can be earned through
the internship program. Guidelines for
program development, assignment of
tasks and academic requirements, such
as exams, papers, reports, grades, etc.,
are established in consultation with a
faculty director at Lycoming and an
agency supervisor at the place of intern-
ship.
Students with diverse majors have
participated in a wide variety of intern-
ships, including those with the Allen-
14
wood Federal Prison Camp, Lycoming
County Commissioners Office, Depart-
ment of Environmental Resources, Head
Start, Lycoming County Historical Soci-
ety, business and accounting firms, law
offices, hospitals, social service agen-
cies, banks, and Congressional offices.
May Term — The May term is a four-
week voluntary session designed to pro-
vide students with courses listed in the
catalog and experimental and special
courses that are not normally available
during the fall and spring semesters and
summer term. Some courses are offered
on campus; others involve travel. A
number offer interdisciplinary credit.
Illustrations of the types of courses
offered during the May term are:
(a) Study-Travel: Cultural tours of
Germany, Spain, and France; Archae-
logical expeditions to the Middle East;
Anthropological expeditions to study
tri-cultural communities in New Mexico;
Utopian Communities; Revolutionary
and Civil War Sites; Colonial America
on Tour; Art on the East Coast; The New
Kingdom in Ancient Egypt.
(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, Field
Ornithology, Energy Economics, Wri-
ter's Seminar, Psychology of Group Pro-
cesses, Collective Bargaining, Aquatic
Biology, Medical Genetics, Energy
Alternatives, White Collar Crime, Las-
ers and their Applications, Selected
Short Story Writers and their Works.
Popular Forms of Contemporary Fiction,
Administrative and Organizational
Behavior of Police, Plant and Green-
house Management, and Street Law.
Although participation in the May
term is voluntary, student response has
been outstanding with approximately 20
percent of the student body enrolling. In
addition to the courses themselves,
attractions include small and informal
classes and reduced tuition rates.
Study Abroad — Students have the
opportunity to study abroad under aus-
pices of approved universities and agen-
cies. While study abroad is particularly
attractive to students majoring in foreign
languages and literatures, this opportun-
ity is open to all students in good
academic standing. Mastery of a foreign
language is desirable but not required in
all programs. Dr. Richard Barker, assis-
tant professor of foreign languages and
literatures, serves as coordinator for the
Study Abroad Program. Interested stu-
dents may contact him about opportuni-
ties available and procedural questions.
NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume
responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare
of any student engaged in or en route to or from
any off-campus study or activity not under the
exclusive jurisdiction of this institution.
Auditors — Any person may audit
courses at Lycoming at one-fourth tui-
tion per course. Laboratory and other
special fees must be paid in full. Exami-
nations, papers, and other evaluation
devices are not required of auditors, but
individual arrangements may be made to
complete such exercises with the consent
of the instructor. The option to audit a
course must be declared during the same
period (currently five days) at the begin-
ning of each semester, half-semester, or
term as drop/add and pass/fail and must
be completed in the Registrar's Office.
Part Time Students — Students who
do not wish to pursue a degree at
Lycoming College may, if space per-
mits, register for credit or audit courses
on either a part-time or full-time basis.
Students who register for one or two
courses are considered to be enrolled part
time; students who register for three or
four courses are considered to be
enrolled full time.
Anyone wishing to register as a
non — degree student must fill out an
application form in the Admissions
Office, pay a one-time application fee of
$20, and pay the tuition rate in effect at
the time of each enrollment. After a
non-degree student has attempted four
courses, the Dean of the College reserves
the right to grant or deny permission to
continue to register in this category.
All non-degree students are subject to
the general laws and regulations of the
College as stated in the College Catalog
and the Student Handbook. The College
reserves the right to deny permission to
register to individuals who do not meet
the standards of the College.
Students who wish to change from a
non-degree to a degree status must re-
apply (with no application fee) and satis-
fy all conditions for admission and
registration in effect at the time of appli-
cation for degree status.
COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS
Lycoming has developed several
cooperative programs to provide stu-
dents with opportunities to extend their
knowledge, abilities, and talents in
selected areas through access to the spe-
cialized academic programs and facili-
ties of other colleges, universities,
academies, and hospitals. Although
thorough advisement and curricular
planning are provided for each of the
cooperative programs, admission to
Lycoming and registration in the pro-
gram of choice do not guarantee admis-
sion to the cooperating institution. The
prerogative of admitting students to the
cooperative aspect of the program rests
with the cooperating institution. Stu-
dents who are interested in a cooperative
program should contact the coordinator
during the first week of the first semester
of their enrollment at Lycoming. This is
necessary to plan their course programs
in a manner that will insure completion
of required courses according to the
schedule stipulated for the program. All
cooperative programs require special
coordination of course scheduling at
Lycoming.
Engineering — Combining the
advantages of a liberal-arts education
and the technical training of an engi-
neering curriculum, this program is
offered in conjunction with Bucknell
University and The Pennsylvania State
University. Students complete three
years of study at Lycoming and two years
at the cooperating university. Upon satis-
factory completion of the first year of
engineering studies, Lycoming awards
the bachelor of arts degree. When stu-
dents successfully complete the second
year of engineering studies, the cooper-
ating university awards the bachelor of
science degree in engineering.
15
At Lycoming, students complete the
distribution program and courses in
physics, mathematics, and chemistry.
Engineering specialties offered at Buck-
nell University include chemical, civil,
electrical, and mechanical. The Pennsyl-
vania State University offers aerospace,
agricultural, chemical, civil, electrical,
engineering science, environmental,
industrial, mechanical, and nuclear engi-
neering.
Forestry or Environmental Studies
— Lycoming College offers a coopera-
tive program with Duke University in
environmental management and fore-
stry. Qualified students can earn the
bachelor's and master's degrees in five
years, spending three years at Lycoming
and two years at Duke. All Lycoming
distribution and major requirements
must be completed by the end of the
junior year. At the end of the first year at
Duke, the B.A. degree will be awarded
by Lycoming. Duke will award the pro-
fessional degree of Master of Forestry or
Master of Environmental Management
to qualified candidates at the end of the
second year.
The major program emphases at Duke
are Natural Resources Science/Ecology,
Natural Resources Systems Science, and
Natural Resources Economics/Policy.
The program is flexible enough, howev-
er, to accommodate a variety of individu-
al designs. An undergraduate major in
one of the natural sciences, social sci-
ences, or business may provide good
preparation for the programs at Duke,
but a student with any undergraduate
concentration will be considered for
admission. All students need at least two
courses each in biology, mathematics,
and economics.
Students begin the program at Duke in
July after their junior year at Lycoming
with a one-month session of field work in
natural resource measurements. They
must complete a total of 60 units which
generally takes four semesters.
Some students prefer to complete the
bachelor's degree before undertaking
graduate study at Duke. The master's
degree requirements for these students
are the same as for those students enter-
ing after the junior year, but the 60-unit
requirement may be reduced for com-
pleted relevant undergraduate work of
satisfactory quality. All credit reductions
are determined individually and consider
the student's educational background
and objectives.
Medical Technology — Students
desiring a career in medical technology
may either complete a bachelor of arts
program followed by a clinical internship
at any American Medical Association-
accredited hospital, or they may com-
plete the cooperative program. Students
electing the cooperative program nor-
mally study for three years at Lycoming,
during which time they complete 24 unit
courses, including the College distribu-
tion requirements, a major, and require-
ments of the National Accrediting Agen-
cy for Clinical Laboratory Sciences
( N A ACLS ) . The current requirements of
the NAACLS are: four courses in chem-
istry (one of which must be either organic
or bio-chemistry): four courses in biolo-
gy (including courses in microbiology
and immunology), and one course in
mathematics.
Students in the cooperative program
usually major in biology, following a
modified major of six unit courses that
exempts them from Ecology (Biology
24) and Plant Sciences (Biology 25).
Students must take either Microbiology
(Biology 21) or Microbiology for the
Health Sciences (Biology 26), and either
Animal Physiology (Biology 23) or Cell
Physiology (Biology 35). The coopera-
tive program requires successful com-
pletion of a one-year internship at an
American Medical Association-
accredited hospital. Lycoming is affil-
iated with the following accredited hos-
pitals: Divine Providence, Robert Pack-
er, Lancaster, and Abington. Students in
the cooperative program receive credit at
Lycoming for each of eight unit courses
in biology and chemistry successfully
completed during the clinical internship.
Successful completion of the Registry
Examination is not considered a gradu-
tion requirement at Lycoming College.
Students entering a clinical internship
for one year after graduation from
Lycoming must complete all of the
requirements of the cooperative pro-
gram, but are not eligible for the biology
major exemptions indicated above.
Upon graduation, such students may
apply for admission to a clinical program
at any hospital.
Optometry — Through the Acceler-
ated Optometry Education Curriculum
Program, students interested in a career
in optometry may qualify for admission
to the Pennsylvania College of Optomet-
ry after only three years at Lycoming
College. After four years at the Pennsyl-
vania College of Optometry, a student
will earn a Doctor of Optometry degree.
Selection of candidates for the profes-
sional segment of the program is com-
pleted by the admissions committee of
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry
during the student's third year at
Lycoming. (This is one of two routes that
students may choose. Any student, of
course, may follow the regular applica-
tion procedures for admission to the
Pennsylvania College of Optometry or
another college of optometry to matricu-
late following completion of his or her
baccalaureate program.) During the
three years at Lycoming College, the
student will complete 24 unit courses,
including all distribution requirements,
and will prepare for his or her profession-
al training by obtaining a solid founda-
tion in biology, chemistry, physics, and
mathematics. During the first year of
study at the Pennsylvania College of
Optometry, the student will take 39
semester hours of basic science courses
in addition to introductions to optometry
and health care. Successful completion
of the first year of professional training
will complete the course requirements
for the B.A. degree at Lycoming Col-
lege.
Most students will find it convenient
to major in biology in order to satisfy the
requirements of Lycoming College and
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry.
Such students are allowed to complete a
modified biology major which will
exempt them from two biology courses:
Ecology (Biology 24) and Plant Sciences
(Biology 25). (This modified major
16
requires the successful completion of the
initial year at the Pennsylvania College
of Optometry.) Students desiring other
majors must coordinate their plans with
the Health Professions Advisory Com-
mittee in order to insure that they have
satisfied all requirements.
Podiatry — Students interested in
podiatry may either seek admission to a
college of pediatric medicine upon com-
pletion of the bachelor of arts degree or
through the Accelerated Podiatric Medi-
cal Education-Curriculum Program
(APMEC). The latter program provides
an opportunity for students to qualify for
admission to the Pennsylvania College of
Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the Ohio
College of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM)
after three years of study at Lycoming.
At Lycoming, students in the APMEC
program must successfully complete 24
unit courses, including the distribution
program and a basic foundation in biolo-
gy, chemistry, physics, and mathema-
tics. During the first year of study at
PCPM or OCPM. students must success-
fully complete a program of basic sci-
ence courses and an introduction to
podiatry. Successful completion of the
first year of professional training will
contribute toward the fulfillment of the
course requirements for the bachelor of
arts degree at Lycoming.
Most students in the cooperative pro-
gram will major in biology: if so. they
will be allowed to complete a modified
major which will exempt them from two
biology courses: Ecology (Biology 24)
and Plant Sciences (Biology 25). (This
modified major requires the successful
completion of the initial year at PCPM or
OCPM).
Students interested in a career in
podiatric medicine should indicate their
intentions to the Health Professions
Advisory Committee.
Sculpture — The Art Department
with the Johnson Atelier Technical
Institute of Sculpture in Princeton, New
Jersey, offers a BFA degree in sculpture.
It uses a classical apprenticeship
approach as its teaching method. This
ancient method of teaching is combined
at Johnson with the most modem and
technically advanced foundry and fabri-
cating techniques.
The Art Department offers a synthesis
program that interrelates the student
experience at both institutions. This is
achieved by having the student rotate
between Lycoming and the atelier so that
each form of education is preparation for
the other. Lycoming offers a core
academic program, a course of study in
the Art Department, and elective course
opportunities. Lycoming gives eight
course units of college credit to the stu-
dent for having successfully completed
one of the apprenticeship programs at the
Johnson Atelier.
All work completed by the student at
Lycoming by the end of the sophomore
year will be applicable to a bachelor of
arts degree with a major in art should the
student decide to withdraw from the BFA
program. If the student should withdraw
from the cooperative program prior to
completing the apprenticeship at the
Johnson Atelier. Lycoming will give up
to four units of credit or one semester's
work for the internship. If, however, the
student completes more work at the ate-
lier than the four units, that extra work
will not be credited to the bachelor of arts
degree: it will only be used as part of the
bachelor of fine arts degree, and then
only if the course at the atelier is com-
pleted.
This course of study is very rigorous.
It will require that the student be
involved almost continuously, either at
Lycoming or at the Johnson Atelier,
during the four years it will take to com-
plete the degree. (See Art Department
listing for specific program.)
Reserve Officers Training Corps
Program (R.O.T.C.) — The program
provides an opportunity for Lycoming
students to enroll in R.O.T.C. Lycoming
notes enrollment in and successful com-
pletion of the program on student tran-
scripts. Military Science is a four-year
program divided into a basic course
given during the freshman and sopho-
more years and an advanced course given
during the junior and senior years. Stu-
dents who have not completed the basic
course may qualify for the advanced
course by completing summer camp
between the sophomore and junior years.
Students enrolled in the advanced course
receive an annual stipend of 51,000.
Students successfully completing the
advanced course and advanced summer
camp between the junior and senior years
will qualify for a commission as a Sec-
ond Lieutenant in the United States
Army upon graduation, and will incur a
service obligation in the active Army or
Army Reserves. The only expense to the
student for this program is the $60
advanced course uniform deposit.
Student Enrichment Semester —
This voluntary program is designed to
expand academic and life opportunities
for students and to provide for participa-
tion in specialized programs and courses
not available at Lycoming. Other mem-
bers of the program are Bucknell and
Susquehanna Universities, the Williams-
port Area Community College, and
Bloomsburg, Lock Haven, and Mans-
field Universities. Student other than
freshmen enroll full or part time for cre-
dit, normally for one semester or term, at
any participating institution in selected
courses. Students in the program remain
fully enrolled as degree candidates at
their home institutions. A special oppor-
tunity within the program is the cross-
registration arrangement with the Wil-
liamsport Area Community College,
whereby students may enroll for less than
a full-time course load while remaining
enrolled in courses at Lycoming.
Washington, United Nations and
London Semester and Capitol Semes-
ter Internship Program — With the
consent of the Department of Political
Science, selected students are permitted
to study in Washington. D.C.. at The
American University for one semester.
They may choose from seven different
programs: Washington Semester. Urban
Semester, Foreign Policy Semester,
International Development Semester,
Economic Policy Semester, Science and
Technology Semester, American Studies
Semester.
With the consent of either the Depart-
17
merit of History or Political Science,
selected students may enroll at Drew
University in Madison, New Jersey, in
the United Nations Semester, which is
designed to provide a first-hand
acquaintance with the world organiza-
tion. Students with special interests in
world history, international relations,
law, and politics are eligible to partici-
pate.
The London Semester programs of
Drew and The American Universities
emphasize European history, politics.
and culture. Interested students partici-
pate with the consent of either the
Departments of History or Political Sci-
ence.
The Capitol Semester Internship Pro-
gram is available to eligible students on a
competitive basis. The program is co-
sponsored by Pennsylvania's Office of
Administration and Department of Edu-
cation. Paid Internships are available to
students in most majors. Interested stu-
dents should contact the Career Develop-
ment Center or the Assistant Dean of the
College for additional information.
The Philadelphia Urban Semester —
A full semester liberal arts program for
professional development and field study
is now available to Lycoming students.
The program components are: field
placement; City Seminar: evening semi-
nars; and living and learning in the city.
The program is open to students major-
ing in any discipline or program. The
Philadelphia Urban Semester is spon-
sored and administered by the Great
Lakes Colleges Association (Albion.
Antioch, Denison, De Pauw, Earlham.
Hope, Kalamazoo. Kenyon, Oberlin.
Ohio Wesleyan, Wabash, Wooster).
Additional information is available from
Dean Grogan.
Normally the above special-semester
programs are open only to juniors.
NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume
responsibility for the health, .safety, or welfare
of students engaged in or en route to or from any
off-campus studies or activities which are not
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu-
tion.
THE SCHOLAR PROGRAM
The Lycoming College Scholar Pro-
gram is a special program designed to
meet the needs and aspirations of highly
motivated students of superior intellectu-
al ability. The Lycommg Scholar satis-
fies the general distribution require-
ments, but on a more exacting level and
with more challenging courses than the
average student. Lycoming Scholars also
participate in special courses and .semi-
nars and in serious independent study
culminating in a senior project super-
vised by their major department.
Students are admitted to the program
by invitation of the Scholar Council, the
group which oversees the program. The
council consists of four students elected
by current scholars and four faculty
selected by the Dean of the College. The
guidelines governing selection of new
scholars are flexible: academic excel-
lence, intellectual curiosity, and creativ-
ity are all taken into account. Students
who desire to participate in the Scholar
Program but are not invited may petition
the Scholar Council for consideration.
To remain in the program, students
must maintain a GPA of 3.0 or better.
Students dropping below this average
will be placed on Scholar probation until
their average improves, or they are asked
to leave the program. To graduate as a
Scholar, a student must have at least a
3.0 cumulative average. Scholars must
take the First Year Scholar Seminar dur-
ing their first semester in the program. In
addition, the following distribution
requirements must be met. (Slightly
modified requirements exist for students
in the cooperative programs; a list of
these requirements can be obtained from
the Scholar Council.)
Scholar Distribution Requirements
for Students in AB
and BFA Programs.
A. English. Scholars must display
above-average writing skills by the end
of the sophomore year, as certified by the
Department of English and the Scholar
Council. This requirement may be met
by obtaining a sufficiently high score on
an appropriate CLEP examination or by a
grade of "B" in English 6. Students not
meeting the requirement in either of
these ways by the end of the freshman
year will be asked to do extra work until
the competency is reached. Beyond
English 6, the requirement is one litera-
ture course numbered 20 or higher.
B. Language/Mathematical Sciences.
Scholars must satisfy the requirement in
either language or mathematical sci-
ences. Language: Scholars must com-
plete two courses numbered 10 or higher
(excluding courses taught in English).
Mathematical Sciences: The mathema-
tics placement test determines whether a
Scholar must take two or three courses
for distribution. These courses must be
numbered 12 or higher. If only two
courses are required. Mathematics 17
may not be included. Only one computer
science course may be used to fulfill the
mathematical sciences requirement.
C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars
must satisfy this requirement in either of
the two areas. Philosophy: Two courses
numbered 20 or higher. Religion: Two
courses numbered 22 or higher.
D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy the
requirement in one of four areas. Art:
Two options are available in art. Either
two courses from Art 22, 23, 24, 31, 32,
33. and 34 (Art History), or two courses
from Art 11, 15, 20, and 25 (Studio Art).
Music: Two courses from Music 17, 30.
or higher. Theatre: Two courses from
Theatre 14 or higher, exluding Theatre
18. Literature: Two literature courses
from English 20 or higher. Foreign Lan-
guages and Literature 25. or other for-
eign^ languages and literatures courses
taught in English.
E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must
satisfy the requirements in one of three
areas. Astronomy/ Physics: Two courses
numbered 1 1 or higher. Biology: Two
courses numbered 10 or higher. Chem-
istrx: Two courses numbered 10 or high-
er.
F. History/Social Sciences. Scholars
must satisfy the requirements in one of
five areas. Economics: Two courses
numbered 10 or higher. History: Two
courses, one of which must be numbered
20 or higher. Political Science: Two
courses numbered 15 or higher. Psxchol-
18
ogy: Two courses including Psychology
10 and one course numbered 24 or higher
(excluding Psychology 38). Sociology/
Anthropology: Two courses including
Sociology 10 and one course numbered
30 or higher.
Scholar Distribution Requirements
for students in BSN Program.
A. English. Same as for AB and BFA
degrees.
B. Mathematical Science. Same as for
AB and BFA degrees. (Note that the
Nursing major requires Mathematics 13
and Computer Science 15.)
C. Philosophy/Religion. Met by tak-
ing Philosophy 19 and Religion 20 pro-
vided that in each course the student
write an additional paper which must
receive a grade of B or better.
D. Fine Arts/Language. Same as for
AB and BFA scholars.
E. Natural Sciences. Met by Biology
13, Biology 14. Biology 26 (required for
the major).
F. History/Social Science. Met by
Psychology 10. Psychology 17,
(required for the major) and one course in
Sociology 30 or higher. (This sociology
course may be taken in lieu of the intro-
ductory guided elective in Sociology for
the BSN.)
All Scholar Students must complete
the following:
G. Physical Education. Scholars must
satisfy the same physical education
requirements stipulated by the College
for all students.
H. Designated Courses. In addition to
completing the distribution require-
ments. Scholars will be required to com-
plete four upper-level courses (numbered
30 and above) chosen from a list of
"designated" courses selected and
maintained by the Scholar Council. Each
full-time Lycoming instructor is invited
to nominate one of his/her courses hav-
ing special depth and merit for inclusion
on this list. The Scholar Council may
alter the list from time to time. A scholar
may use no more than two such desig-
nated courses from any one department
to satisfy this requirement. Normally.
Scholars will not begin taking designated
courses until their sophomore year.
I. Senior Project. In the senior year,
scholars must successfully complete an
independent studies or departmental
honors project which has been approved
in advance by the Independent Studies
Committee and the Scholar Council.
This project must be presented orally and
be accepted by the Scholar Council.
J. Scholars must complete a major and
32 units, exclusive of the First Year
Scholar Seminar.
K. In the case of transfer students and
those who seek to enter the program after
their freshman year and in other cases
deemed by the Scholar Council to
involve special or extraordinary circum-
stances, the Council shall make adjust-
ments to the Scholar distribution
requirements provided that in all cases
such exceptions and adjustments would
still satisfy the regular College distribu-
tion requirements.
19
Curriculum
Numbers 1-9 Elementary courses in
departments where such courses are
not counted as part of the student's
major.
Number 10-19 Freshman level courses
Numbers 20-29 Sophomore level
courses
Numbers 30-39 Junior level courses
Numbers 40-49 Senior level courses
Numbers 50-59 Non-catalog courses
(offered on a limited basis)
Numbers 60-69 Applied Music
Numbers 70-79 Internships
Numbers 80-89 Independent Study
Numbers 90-99 Independent Study for
Department Honors
Courses not in sequence are listed sepa-
rately, as:
Drawing Art 1 1
Color Theory Art 12
Courses which imply a sequence are
indicated with a dash between, meaning
that the first semester must be taken prior
to the second, as:
Intermediate French
French 10-11
All students have the right of access to all
courses.
ACCOUNTING
Professor: Richmond (Chairperson)
Assistant Professors: Kuhns, Wienecke
The purpose of the accounting major is
to help prepare the student for a career
within the accounting profession. The
major has two tracks. Track I is designed
for students whose primary interests lie
in the financial area or public accounting
and provides preparation for the Certi-
fied Public Accountant Examination;
Track II is designed for students with an
interest in management accounting and
provides preparation for the Certified
Management Accountant Examination.
Track I — Financial Accounting
requires: Accounting 10, 20-21, 30, 40,
41, 43, 45, Mathematics 13, Computer
Science 15, and one unit to be selected
from Accounting 25, 26. 3 1 , 42, 46, 47,
and 48 or Internship. Business 10 may be
substituted for Accounting 10 if a student
changes majors. Duplicate credit will not
be granted.
Students seeking entry into the public
accounting field are advised to investi-
gate the professional requirements for
certification in the state in which they
intend to practice so that they may meet
all educational requirements prior to gra-
duation. All Track 1 majors are advised
to enroll in Economics 10 and 1 1, Busi-
ness 35, 36, and 38, and one of the
following: Business 33, Economics 20,
or 37.
Track II — Management Accounting
requires: Accounting 10, 20-21, 30-31.
44, Mathematics 13, Computer Science
15, Business 38-39, and 40. All Track II
majors are advised to enroll in Econom-
ics 10-11 and Business 35-36. Students
planning to sit for the Certified Manage-
ment Accountant Examination are
advised to enroll in Accounting 40,
41-42, 43, and a one-half unit (2 credits)
internship during the fall semester of the
senior year together with Accounting 43
or a one-half unit (2 credits) independent
study. Business 10 may be substituted
for Accounting 10 if a student changes
majors. Duplicate credit will not be
granted.
Three minors are offered by the
Department of Accounting. The follow-
ing courses are required to complete a
minor in Financial Accounting:
Accounting 10, 20, 21, 43, 47 and any
other accounting course or independent
study. A minor in Managerial Account-
ing requires the completion of Account-
ing 10, 20, 30, 31, and 44. To obtain a
minor in Federal Income Tax, a student
must complete Accounting 10, 20, 21,
41, and 42.
10 ELEMENTARY
ACCOUNTING THEORY
An introductory course in recording, classify-
ing, summarizing, and interpreting the basic
business transaction. Problems of classifica-
tion and interpretation of accounts and prepa-
ration of financial statements are studied. Not
open to students who have received credit
for Business 10. Prerequisite: Second-
semester freshman or consent of instructor.
20-21 INTERMEDIATE
ACCOUNTING THEORY
An intensive study of accounting statements
and analytical procedures with an emphasis
upon corporate accounts, various decision
models, price-level models, earnings per
share, pension accounting, accounting for
leases, and financial statement analysis. Pre-
requisite: Accounting 10.
25 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS
Deals with the analysis of financial statements
as an aid to decision making . The theme of the
course is understanding the financial data
which are analyzed as well as the methods by
which they are analyzed and interpreted. This
course should prove of value to all who need a
thorough understanding of the uses to which
financial statements are put as well as to those
who must know how to use them intelligently
and effectively. This includes accountants,
secunty analysts, lending officers, credit anal-
ysts, managers, and all others who make deci-
sions on the basis of financial data. Prere-
quisite: Accounting 10 or Business 10. May
term.
26 GOVERNMENT AND
FUND ACCOUNTING
This course is designed to introduce account-
ing for not-for-profit organizations. Munici-
pal accounting and reporting are studied. Pre-
requisite: Accounting 10 or Business 10.
One-half unit of credit.
30-31 COST AND BUDGETARY
ACCOUNTING THEORY
Methods of accounting for material, labor,
and factory overhead expenses consumed in
manufacturing using job order, process, and
standard costing. Application of cost
accounting and budgetary theory to decision
making in the area of make or buy, expansion
of production and sales, and accounting for
control are dealt with. Prerequisites:
Accounting 20 and Mathematics 1 3 or consent
of instructor.
40 AUDITING THEORY
A study of the science or art of verifying,
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and
reports. The goal of the course is to emphasize
concepts which will enable students to under-
stand the philosophy and environment of
auditing. Special attention is given to the
public accounting profession, studying audit-
ing standards, professional ethics, the legal
liability inherent in the attest function, the
study and evaluation of internal control, the
nature of evidence, the growing use of statisti-
cal sampling, the impact of electronic data
processing, and the basic approach to plan-
ning an audit. Finally, various audit reports
expressing independent expert opinions on the
fairness of financial statements are studied.
21
Prerequisites: Accounting 21. Mathematics
13. and Computer Science 15.
41 FEDERAL INCOME TAX
ACCOUNTING AND PLANNING
Analysis of the provisions of the Interna!
Revenue Code relating to income, deductions,
inventories, and accounting methods. Practi-
cal problems involving determination of
income and deductions, capital gains and los-
ses, computation and payment of taxes
through withholding at the source and through
declaration are considered. Planning transac-
tions so that a minimum amount of tax will
result is emphasized. Prerequisite: Account-
ing 10 or consent of instructor.
42 FEDERAL INCOME TAX
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING
An analysis of the provisions of the Internal
Revenue Code relating to partnerships,
estates, trusts, and corporations. An extensive
series of problems is considered, and effective
tax planning is emphasized. Prerequisite:
Accounting 41.
43 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING I
An intensive study of partnerships, install-
ment and consignment sales, branch account-
ing, bankruptcy and reorganization, estates
and trusts, government entities, non-profit
organizations, and accounting and reporting
for the SEC. Prerequisite: Accounting 21.
One-half unit of credit.
44 CONTROLLERSHIP
Control process in the organization. General
systems theory, financial control systems,
centralization-decentralization, performance
measurement and evaluation, forecasts and
budgets, and marketing, production and
finance models for control purposes. Prere-
quisite: Accounting 31 or consent of instruc-
tor. Alternate years.
45 AUDITING PRACTICE
An audit project is presented, solved and the
auditor's report written. THIS COURSE IS
LIMITED TO STUDENTS WHO HAVE
EITHER COMPLETED OR ARE
ENROLLED IN ACCOUNTING 40. One-
half unit of credit. Grade will be recorded as
S" or "U".
46 SEMINAR ON APB OPINIONS
AND FASB STANDARDS
A seminar course for accounting majors with
library assignments to gain a workable under-
standing of the highly technical opinions of
the Accounting Principles Board and stan-
dards of the Financial Accounting Standards
Board. One term paper. Possible trip to New
York City to attend a public hearing of the
Financial Accounting Standards Board. Pre-
requisite: Accounting 10. May term.
47 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II
Certain areas of advanced accounting theory,
including business combinations, consoli-
dated financial statements, and accounting
and reporting for the Securities and Exchange
Commission are covered. Prerequisite:
Accounting 21. One-half unit of credit.
48 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS
FOR CPA CANDIDATES
Problems from the Accounting Practice sec-
tions of Past C.P.A. examinations, which
require a thorough knowledge of the core
courses in their solution, are assigned. The
course is intended to meet the needs of those
interested in public accounting and prepara-
tion for the Certified Public Accountant's
examination. Prerequisite: Accounting 30 or
consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit.
Grade will be recorded as "S" or "U" .
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns in accounting typically work off cam-
pus under the supervision of a public or private
accountant.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index!
Typical examples of recent studies in
accounting are; computer program to generate
financial statements, educational core for
public accountants, inventory control, and
church taxation.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENT HONORS
(See index)
ACCOUNTING —
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
Assistant Professor: Kuhns
(Coordinator)
The accounting-mathematical sciences
interdisciplinary major is designed to
offer, within a liberal-arts framework,
courses which will aid in constructing
mathematical models for business deci-
sion making. Students obtain the neces-
sary substantial background in both
mathematical sciences and accounting.
Required accounting courses are:
Accounting 10, 20. 2 1 , 30, 3 1 , 4 1 , 42. In
mathematical sciences required courses
are: Computer Science 15 and 37 and
Mathematics 12, 18, 19. 38 and 13 or 32.
Recommended courses include: Mathe-
matics 20, 33; Business 23, 24, 35, 36,
38, 39; Computer Science 26; Econom-
ics 10, 11; Psychology 15, 24; and
Sociology 10.
AMERICAN STUDIES
Professor: Piper
(Coordinator)
The American studies major offers a
comprehensive program in American
civilization which introduces students to
the complexities underlying the develop-
ment of America and its contemporary
life. The 13 major courses include:
FOUR CORE COURSES — The
primary integrating units of the major,
these team-taught courses will teach you
how to think of ideas from different
points of view and how to correlate infor-
mation and methods from various dis-
ciplines:
America As a Civilization
(First semester of major study)
American Studies — Research and
Methodology (Second semester)
American Tradition in the Arts and
Literature (Third semester)
Internship or Independent Study
(Junior and/or senior year)
CONCENTRATION AREAS — Six
courses in one option and three in the
other are needed. Six primary
concentration-option courses in Ameri-
can Arts or American Society build
around the insights gained in the core
courses. They focus particular attention
on areas most germane to academic and
vocational interests. The three additional
courses from the other option give fur-
ther breadth to understanding of Ameri-
ca. Students also will be encouraged to
take elective courses relating to other
cultures.
American Arts Concentration Option
American Art — Art 24
American Art of the 20th Century — Art 23
19th Century American Literature — English 22
20th Century American Literature — Engish 23
American Music — Music 18 or 19
American Theatre
22
American Society
Concentration Option
U.S. Social and Intellectual History to 1877 —
History 42
U.S. Social and Intellectual History since 1877 —
History 43
American Economic Development
Racial and Cultural Minorities — Sociology 34
American Political Tradition
Students should design their American
Studies major in consultation with the
program coordinator or a member of the
American Studies Committee.
10 AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION
An analysis of the historical, sociocultural.
economic, and political perspectives of
American civlization with special attention to
the inter-relationships between these various
orientations.
1 1 AMERICAN STUDIES — RESEARCH
AND METHODOLOGY
The study and application of various research
methods, including new trends in historical
study, quantitative analysis, cross-cultural
studies, and on-site inspection.
12 AMERICAN TRADITION IN
THE ARTS AND LITERATURE
The relationship of the arts and literature to the
various historical periods of American life.
70-79 or 80-89 INTERNSHIP OR
INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
An opportunity to relate the learning in the
core courses and the concentration areas to an
actual supervised off-campus learning situa-
tion or independent study project.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
HONORS (See index)
ART
Associate Professors: Bogle
(Chairperson), Shipley
Part-time Instructor: Hanks
Adjunct Faculty at Johnson Atelier:
Van Tongeren, Barre, Lash, Pitynski
The Art Department offers two degree
programs: a bachelor of arts degree and a
bachelor of fine arts in sculpture.
The B.A. degree:
To complete a bachelor of arts degree
with a major in art. a student must com-
plete one of the following three tracks:
Track I — Two-Dimensional
The two-dimensional track consists of
Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 21). Figure
Modeling I (Art 16), Two-Dimensional
Design (Art 15), and Painting I and 11
(Art 20 and 30). Printmaking I and II (Art
28 and 38) may be substituted for Paint-
ing I and II (Art 20 and 30). Students
must also take Art 22 and 23 (Survey of
Art) and two additional courses in art
history (Art 24, 31, 32, 33, 34. 39).
Studio Research (Art 46) is required
along with participation in a senior
exhibition.
Track II — Three-Dimensional
The three-dimensional track consists
of Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 21),
Figure Modeling (Art 16), Sculpture I
and II (Art 25 and 35), and either Figure
Modeling II (Art 26) or Sculpture III (Art
45). Students must also take Art 22 and
Art 23 (Survey of Art) and two additional
courses in art history (Art 24, 3 1 , 32, 33,
34, 39). Studio Research (Art 46) is
required along with participation in a
senior exhibition.
Track III — Commercial Design
The commercial design track consists
of Drawing I and II (Art II and 21),
Color Theory (Art 12), Two-
Dimensional Design (Art 15), Figure
Modeling I (Art 16), Survey of Art (Art
22 and 23), Photography I (Art 27),
Special Projects in Commercial Design
(Art 42), Layout and Design (GCO 511),
Typographic Composition (GCO 512),
and Process Camera (GCO 521 ). Course
descriptions for the last three required
courses are shown under Mass Commu-
nication offerings available at Williams-
port Area Community College.
The following courses are recom-
mended: Photography II (Art 37), Intern-
ship (Art 70-79), Advertising (Business
32), Writing for Special Audiences
(English 16), Introduction to Mass Com-
munication (Mass Comm 10), Social
Psychology (Psy 24).
The BFA degree in sculpture:
The student completes a specified
course of study in the Art Department,
the Lycoming College distribution
requirements, and one of the field spe-
cialization apprenticeship programs at
the Johnson Atelier in Princeton, New
Jersey.
The Art Department course of study
consists of 12 courses in studio and art
history: Figure Modeling I and II (Art 16
and 26), Sculpture I and II (Art 25 and
35), Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 21),
Introduction to Photography (Art 27),
2-D Design (Art 15), Survey of Art (Art
22 and 23), and two additional courses in
Art History (Art 24, 31. 32, 33, 34, 39).
Twelve additional course units are
required of the student. The student must
meet the requirements of the distribution
program within these courses.
The student must also complete one of
the field specialization apprenticeships at
the Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of
Sculpture in Princeton, New Jersey. This
requires the student to be at the Johnson
Atelier for a period of between 16 and
23 '/2 months. The student receives eight
course units of credit at Lycoming Col-
lege for successfully completing the field
specialization apprenticeship at Johnson
Atelier. It is expected that the work for
the apprenticeship component will be
completed during the summers and the
junior year.
Admission to the BFA degree program
is on the basis of meeting the admission
standards of Lycoming College, and
passing a portfolio review and interview
by members of the Lycoming College
Art Department.
Three minors are being offered by the
Art Department. Requirements for each
follow: Art History: Art 22, 23, and two
advanced history courses; Sculpture: Art
16, 26, 25, and 35 plus one of the fol-
lowing: 21 , 29, or 45; Painting: Art 1 1 .
15, 20, 30, and either 21 or 23.
1 1 DRAWING I
Study of the human figure with gesture and
proportion stressed. Student is made familiar
with different drawing techniques and media.
Some drawings from nature. Offered in alter-
nate semesters with Drawing II and III.
23
i: COLOR THEORY
A study of ihe physical and emotional aspects
of color. Emphasis will be placed on the study
ofcolorasan aesthetic agent for the artist. The
color theories of Johannes Itten will form the
base for this course with some study of the
theories of Albert Munsell. Faber Berren. and
Wilhelm Ostwald.
I? TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN
The basic fundamentals found in the two-
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space,
color, and composition are taught in relation-
ship to the other two-dimensional arts. Per-
ceptual theories and their relationships to what
and why we see what we see in art are dis-
cussed with each problem.
16 FIGURE MODELING I
Understanding the figure will be approached
through learning the basic structures and prop-
ortions of the figure. The course is conceived
as a three-dimensional drawing class. At least
one figure per student will be cast.
19 CERAMICS I
Emphasis placed on pottery design as it relates
to function of vessels and the design parame-
ters imposed by the characteristics of clay.
The techniques of ceramics are taught to
encourage expression rather than to dispense
merely a technical body of information.
20 PAINTING I
An introduction of painting techniques and
materials Coordination of color, value, and
design within the painting is taught Some
painting from the figure. No limitations as to
painting media, subject matter, or style. Pre-
requisite: An 15 or consent of inslruclor.
21 DRAWING II
Continued study of the human figure. Empha-
sis is placed on realism and figure-ground
coordination with the use of value and design .
Prerequisite: Art II
11 SURVEY OF ART: PRE-HISTORY
THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES
A survey of Western architecture, sculpture,
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation
of form and content and on the relatedness of
Ihe visual arts to their cultural environment:
Paleolithic Art. Near East, Egypt, Greece,
Rome, and Medieval Europe.
23 SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE
RENAISSANCE THROUGH THE
MODERN AGE
A survey of Western architecture, sculpture,
and painting. Emphasis is on the Interrelation
of form and content and on the relatedness of
the visual arts to their cultural environment:
I4th-20th centuries.
24 AMERICAN ART OF THE I8TH
AND 19TH CENTURIES
The development of the arts in America from
Colonial times through the 19th Century; from
the unknown folk artist to popular artists such
as Winslow Homer and Thomas Eakins.
25 SCULPTURE I
An introduction to the techniques, materials,
and ideas of sculpture. Clay, plaster, wax,
wood, and other materials will be used. The
course will be concerned with ideas about
sculpture as expression, and with giving
material form to ideas.
26 FIGURE MODELING II
Will exploit the structures and understandings
learned in Figure Modeling 1 to produce lar-
ger, more complex figurative works. There
will be a requirement to cast one of the works
in plaster. Prerequisites: Art 16 and consent of
instructor.
11 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY
Objectives of the course are to develop techni-
cal skills in the use of photographic equipment
(cameras, films, darkroom, printmakerl and
to develop sensitivity in the areas of composi-
tion, form, light, picture quality, etc. Each
student must own or have access to a 35mm
camera.
28 PRINTMAKING I
Introduction to the techniques of silkscreen.
intaglio, monotype, and lithography pnnting.
One edition of at least six pnnts must be
completed in each area. Prerequisite: Art II
or 15 or consent of instructor.
29 CERAMICS II
Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on use
of the wheel and technical aspects such as
glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequisite: Art
19.
30 PAINTING II
Emphasis is placed on individual style and
technique. Artists and movements in art are
studied. No limitations as to painting media,
subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: Art 20.
31 20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART
Stylistic developments in Europe from 1 880 to
the present, including Cubism. Fauvism,
Expressionism, Dada, and Surrealism. Picas-
so. Matisse. Kandinsky. and Mondrian are
among the major artists studied.
32 AMERICAN ART OF THE
20TH CENTURY
Painting, sculpture, and architecture in the
United States from 1900 to the present with
emphasis on developments of the 1950's and
1960's: an inquiry Into the meaning and his-
torical roots of contemporary art.
33 I9TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART
Emphasis on painting, sculpture, and
architecture of Western Europe from 1760 to
1900, including the work of late 18th-century
artists David and Goya and 19th-century
developments from Romanticism through
Post-Impressionism.
34 ART OF THE RENAISSANCE
Painting, sculpture, and architecture in Italy
and the Northern countries from the late 13th
century through the early 1 6th century. Artists
Include Giotto, Donatello, Alberti, Leonardo
da Vinci, Michelangelo, Van Eyck, Durer,
and Bruegel.
35 SCULPTURE II
A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 25).
Emphasis is on advanced technical process.
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture
will be done in the school foundry. Prerequis-
ite: Art 25.
37 PHOTOGRAPHY II
To extend the skills developed in Photography
I by continued growth in technical expertise
including instruction in the use and capabili-
ties of large format view cameras. Emphasis is
placed on conceptual and aesthetic aspects of
photography. Prerequisite: An 27.
38 PRINTMAKING II
Further study of the techniques of silk.screen,
intaglio, monotype, and lithography printing
with emphasis on multi plate and viscosity
pnnting Two editions of at least six prints
must be completed in each of two areas. Pre-
requisite: An 28.
39 WOMEN IN ART
A survey of women artists from a variety of
viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social,
political and economic — which seeks to
understand and integrate the contributions of
women artists into the mainstream of the his-
tory of art . No prerequisite.
40 PAINTING III
Professional quality is stressed. There is some
experimentation w ith new painting techniques
and styles.
41 DRAWING III
Continued study of human figure, individual
style, and professional control of drawing
techniques and media are now emphasized.
42 SPECIAL PROJECT IN
COMMERCIAL DESIGN
Concentrated research, preparation, and
execution of one major project in commercial
design chosen by the student in consultation
with the instructor. Preliminary concepts, pre-
paratory layout and design and finished work
will culminate in a portfolio and presentation.
24
Prerequisite: permission of the An Depari-
menl.
45 SCULPTURE III
In Sculpture III the student is expected to
produce a series of sculptures that follow a
conceptual and technical line of development.
Prerequisites: Art 16, 25. and 35.
46 STUDIO RESEARCH
Independent research in an elective studio
area, conducted under the supervision of the
appropriate faculty member, includes creation
of vs'ork which ma\ be incorporated in the
senior group exhibition. Student works in
private studio assigned by the department.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Commercial design, interior design, and
photography programs in local businesses,
and museum work at the Lycoming County
Historical Museum.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the art
nouveau. lithography, photography, pottery,
problems in illustration, and watercolor.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS
Professor: Fineman (on leave)
Associate Professor: Erickson
(Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Fisher, Keig
The department offers two majors.
The major in astronomy is specifically
(designed to train students in the field of
planetarium education: it also may serve
as a basis for earning state certification as
a secondary school teacher of general
science. The major in physics can pre-
pare students for graduate work in phys-
ics, astronomy, and related physical sci-
ences, for the cooperative program in
engineering, for state certification as sec-
ondary school teachers of physics, or for
technical positions in industry.
Astronomy
The major in astronomy requires
Astronomy 11, either 12 or 13, 30. 44,
45 and 46; Physics 25 and 26: Mathema-
tics 18 and 19: and Chemistry 10 and 1 1
or 30 and 3 1 . Juniors and seniors major-
ing in astronomy are also required to
register for four semesters of Astronomy
49 (non-credit colloquia). In addition,
the following cognate courses are recom-
mended: Physics 27 and 33: Philosophy
21. 22. and 33: Music 22: and Art 27.
3 OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY
A methods course providing the opportunity
to make a vanety of astronomical observa-
tions, both visually and photographically,
with and without telescopes. The planetarium
is used to familianze the student with the sky
at vanous times dunng the year and from
different locations on eanh. May or summer
term only.
4 FIELD GEOLOGY
A methods course introducing the field tech-
niques needed to study the geology of an area.
Max or summer term only.
5 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY
A comprehensive view of the evolution of
astronomical thought from ancient Greece to
the present, emphasizing the impact that astro-
nomical discovenes and the conquest of space
have had on Western culture. May or summer
term only.
1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B)
1 1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A)
A summary of current concepts of the universe
from the solar system to distant galaxies.
Describes the techniques and instruments used
in astronomical research. Presents not only
what is reasonably well known about the uni-
verse, but also considers some of the major
unsolved problems. Astronomy I and 1 1 share
the same three hours of lecture and mo hours
of laboratory each week. II has one addition-
al hour each week for more advanced mathe-
matical treatment of the material. Credit may
not he earned for both I and II. Corequisite
for II: Mathematics 17 or consent of instruc-
tor.
2 EARTH SCIENCE (B)
12 EARTH SCIENCE (A)
A study of the physical processes that continu-
ally affect the planet Earth, shaping our envi-
ronment. Descnbes how past events and life-
forms can be reconstructed from preserved
evidence to reveal the history of our planet
from its ongin to the present. Emphasizes the
ways in which geology, meteorology, and
oceanography interrelate with man and the
environment. Astronomy 2 and 12 share the
same three hours of lecure and two hours of
laboratory each week. 12 has one additional
hour each week for more advanced mathe-
matical treatment of the material. Credit may
not be earned for both 2 and 12. Corequisite
for 12: Mathematics 17 or consent of instruc-
tor.
13 METEOROLOGY
The general propenies of the atmosphere and
their measurements will be discussed in terms
of basic physical and chemical laws. Two
basic themes will guide the approach, i.e. . the
atmosphere behaves like a giant heat engine,
and weather patterns exist from a micro-to-
macro scale. May or summer term only. Alter-
nate years.
30 PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES
A methods course covering major aspects of
planetarium programming, operation and
maintenance. Students are required to prepare
and present a planetarium show. Upon suc-
cessfully completing the course, students are
eligible to become planetarium assistants.
Three hours of lecture and demonstration and
three hours of practical training per week.
Prerequisites: Astronomy I or II (Principles
of Astronomy) or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.
44 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY
A detailed presentation of the special theory of
relativity, and a short view of the general
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con-
cepts of the universe, with particular attention
to alternative modem cosmological models.
Discussion of the Cosmological Principle, its
rationale, and its implications. Four hours of
lecture per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy
1 1 1 Principles of Astronomy A) and Physics 25
(Introductory Physics with Calculus I). Alter-
nate years. Cross-listed as Physics 44.
45 STELLAR EVOLUTION
The physical pnnciples governing the internal
structure and external appearance of stars.
Mechanisms of energy generation and trans-
port within stars. The evolution of stars from
initial formation to final stages. The creation
of chemical elements by nucleosynthesis.
Four hours of lecture per week. Prerequisites:
Astronomy 1 1 (Principles of Astronomy A )
and Physics 26 (Introductory Physics with
Calculus II). Alternate years.
46 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND
GALACTIC STRUCTURE
The motion of objects in gravitational fields.
Introduction to the n-body problem. The rela-
tion between stellar motions and the galactic
potential. The large scale structure of galaxies
in general and of the Milky Way Galaxy in
particular. Four hours of lecture per week.
Prerequisites: Astronomy II (Principles of
Astronomy A) and Physics 25 (Introductory
Phvsics with Calculus I). Alternate years.
25
49 ASTRONOMY AND
PHYSICS COLLOQUIA
This non-credil but required course forjuniors
and seniors majoring in astronomy and phys-
ics offers students a chance to meet and hear
active scientists in astronomy, physics, and
related scientit~ic areas talk about their own
research or professional activities. In addi-
tion, majors in astronomy and physics must
present two lectures, one given dunng the
Junior year and one given during the senior
year, on the results of a literature survey or on
individual research. Students majoring in this
department are required to attend four semes-
ters during the junior and senior years. A letter
grade will be given when the student gives a
lecture. Otherwise the grade will be S/U.
Students in the Cooperative Program in Liber-
al Arts and Engineenng are required to attend
two semesters and present one lecture during
their junior year. One hour per week. Cross-
lisled as Physics 49.
1Q)-19 INTERNSHIP (See index)
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Independent studies may be undertaken in
most areas of astronomy.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
Physics
The major in physics requires Physics
25. 26. 31, 32. and four additional phys-
ics courses numbered 27 and above. Up
to two courses chosen from Astronomy
II. 12. 1 3 . 45 , and 46 may substitute for
two of the four physics electives. Also
required are Mathematics 18 and 19, and
Chemistry 10 and 11 or 30 and 31.
Juniors and seniors majoring in physics
are required to register for four semesters
of Physics 49 (non-credit colloquia). In
addition, the following cognate courses
are recommended: Mathematics 20 and
21 (these are required for the cooperative
engineering program and by most gradu-
ate schools): Computer Science 15
(required for the cooperative engineering
program); and Philosophy 21, 22, and
33, A foreign language is recommended
for students planning on graduate study.
6 ENERGY ALTERNATIVES
A physicist's definition of work, energy, and
power. The various energy sources available
for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear fission
and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and geother-
mal. The advantages and disadvantages of
each energy conversion method, including
availability, efficiency, and environmental
effects. Present areas of energy research and
possible future developments. Projections of
possible future energy demands. Exercises
and expenments in energy collection, conver-
sion, and utilization. May or summer term
only.
1.5-16 PHYSICS WITH LIFE
SCIENCE APPLICATIONS
The basic concepts, principles, and laws of
physics are presented in this noncalculus
introductory physics course. Topics include
mechanics, elastic properties of matter,
fluids, thermodynamics, electricity and mag-
netism, waves, optics, and radioactivity.
Many of the examples and problems used to
illustrate the physics are selected from the life
sciences. Three hours of lecture, one hour of
recitation, and one three-hour laboratory per
week. Prerequisite: Mathematics 17 or con-
sent of instructor. (Credit may not be earned
for both 15 and 25 or for both 16 and 26.1.
25-26
INTRODUCTORY PHYSICS
WITH CALCULUS
A mathematically rigorous introduction to
physics designed for majors in physics, astro-
nomy, chemistry, and mathematics. Topics
include mechanics, thermodynamics, electr-
icity and magnetism, waves, optics, and mod-
em physics. Five hours of lecture and recita-
tion and one three-hour laboratory per week.
Corequisite: Mathematics 18-19 (Calculus I
and 11). (Credit may not be earned for both 15
and 25 or for both 16 and 26).
27 ELECTRONICS
D.C. and A.C. circuit and network theory,
active devices such as transistors, operational
amplifiers, integrated circuits, and introduc-
tion to digital electronics will be covered.
Three lectures and two mo-hour laboratory
sessions per week. Prerequisites: Physics 16
or 26. and Mathematics 9 or 18 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
31 MECHANICS
Kinematics and dynamics of single particles
and systems of particles. Rigid bodies. Intro-
duction to the mechanics of continuous media.
Moving reference frames. Lagrangian
mechanics. Four hours of lecture and three
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisites:
Physics 25 (Introductory Physics with Calcu-
lus I) and Mathematics 19 (Calculus II).
32 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
The electromagnetic field, electrical poten-
tial, magnetic field, and electric and magnetic
properties of matter. Electric circuits Max-
well's equations. Laboratory includes elec-
tronics as well as classical electricity and
magnetism. Four hours of lecture and three
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite :
Physics 26 (Introductory Physics with Calcu-
lus 111
33 OPTICS
Geometrical optics, optical systems, physical
optics, interference, Fraunhofer and Fresnel
diffraction, and coherence and lasers will be
covered. Three hours of lecture and three
hours of labratory per week. Prerequisites:
Physics 16 or 26. and Mathematics 9 or 18 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
37 THERMODYNAMICS AND
STATISTICAL MECHANICS
Classical thermodynamics will be presented,
showing that the macroscopic properties of a
system can be specified without a knowledge
of the microscopic properties of the consti-
tuents of the system. Then statistical mechan-
ics will be developed . showing that these same
macroscopic properties are determined by the
microscopic properties. Four hours of lecture
and recitation per week. Prerequisites: Phys-
ics 26 (Introductory Physics with Calculus II)
and Mathematics 19 (Calculus II). Alternate
years.
38 ATOMIC AND
MOLECULAR PHYSICS
The development of the principles and
methods of quantum mechanics from the ear-
liest evidence of quantization. Structure and
spectra of atoms and molecules. Extension of
quantum theory to the solid state. Four hours
of lecture and recitation and one three-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Physics 26
(Introductory Physics with Calculus III and
Mathematics 19 (Calculus II). Alternate
years.
44 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY
A detailed presentation of the special theory of
relativity, and a short view of the general
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con-
cepts of the universe, with particular attention
to alternative modem cosmological models.
Discussion of the Cosmological Principle, its
rationale, and its implications. Four hours of
lecture per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy II
(Principles of Astronomy A) and Physics 25
(Introductory Physics with Calculus 1). Alter-
nate years. Cross-listed as Astronomy 44.
47 NUCLEAR AND
PARTICLE PHYSICS
The course will consider properties of nuclei,
nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear reac-
tions (including fission and fusion), and prop-
enies of elementary panicles. The interactions
of nuclear particles with matter and the detec-
tion of nuclear particles will be covered. It will
be shown how observed phenomena lead to
theories on the nature of fundamental interac-
tions, how these forces act at the smallest
26
measurable distances, and what is expected to
occur at even smaller distances. Four hours of
lecture and recitation and mo hours of hiho-
raloryper week^ Prerequisites: either Physics
26 (Introductory Physics with Calculus II) or
Phxsics 16 (Physics with Life Science Appli-
cations II). Mathematics 19. and either Phys-
ics iS (Atomic and Molecular Physics) or
Chemistrx 10. .Alternate \ears.
48 INTRODUCTION TO
QUANTUM MECHANICS
Basic concepts and formulation of quantum
theory. The free particle, the simple harmonic
oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and central
force problems will be discussed. Both time-
mdependent and time-dependent perturbation
theory will be covered. Four hours of lecture
and recitation. Prerequisite: either Physics 26
(Introductory Physics with Calculus II) or
Chemistry 3J (Physical Chemistry II). and
Mathematics 21 (Differential Equations).
Cross-listed as Chemistry 39.
49 ASTRONOMY AND
PHYSICS COLLOQUIA
This non-credit but required course for juniors
and seniors majoring in astronomy and phys-
ics offers students a chance to meet and hear
active scientists in astronomy, physics, and
related scientific areas talk about their own
research or professional activities. In addi-
tion, majors in astronomy and physics must
present two lectures, one given during the
junior year and one given during the senior
year, on the results of a literature survey or on
individual research. Students majoring in this
department are required to attend four semes-
ters during the junior and senior years. A letter
grade will be given when the student gives a
lecture. Otherwise the grade will be S/U.
Students in the Cooperative Program in Liber-
al Arts and Engineenng are required to attend
two semesters and present one lecture during
their junior year. One hour per week. Cross-
listed as Astronomy 49.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns in physics work off campus under the
supervision of professional physicists
employed by local industries or hospitals.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Independent studies may be undertaken in
most areas of physics.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
BIOLOGY
Associate Professors: Angstadt
(Chairperson), Diehl, Zaccaria
Assistant Professors: Gabriel,
Pottmeyer. Zimmerman
A major consists of eight biology
courses, including 10-11. 21, 22,23,24,
and 25. With departmental consent.
Biology 26 may be substituted for Biolo-
gy 21. Only two courses numbered
below 20 may count toward the major.
Departmental internships cannot be used
to fulfill the eighth required course. In
addition, three units of chemistry and
two units of mathematical science are
required. The chemistry requirement
must include at least one unit of organic
chemistry chosen from Chemistry 15,
20. or 21. The mathematical science
courses must be chosen from Computer
Science 15 and Mathematics 9. 13, 17 or
above, or their equivalent. Certain spe-
cific exceptions to the core program will
be made for three-year students enrolled
in cooperative programs. Such excep-
tions are noted under the particular
cooperative program described in the
Academic Program chapter of the cata-
log. Students interested in these prog-
rams should contact the program director
before finalizing their individual prog-
rams. Credit may not be earned for both
Biology 1 and 10 or for both Biology 2
and 1 1 . Consent of instructor may
replace Biology 10-11 as a prerequisite
for all biology courses.
A minor in Biology requires the com-
pletion of four upper-level (20's or high-
er) courses, with their appropriate prere-
quisites. At least two of these must be
from the 20"s series of courses. A minor
with a special name (e.g.. Environmen-
tal Science) may be designed by an indi-
vidual.
1-2 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY
An investigation of biological principles,
including ecological systems, form and func-
tion in selected representative organisms
(especially man), cell theory, molecular biol-
ogy, reproduction, inhentance, adaptation,
and evolution. The course is designed primar-
ily for students not planning to major in the
biological sciences. Three hours of lecture
and one two-hour laboratory per week.
3 FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS
A methods course for students preparing to
teach biology. Sources and methods of col-
lecting and preserving various plant and ani-
mal materials. Summer term only.
5-6 HUMAN BIOLOGY
An introduction to the physics and chemistry
relative to biological systems. Human ana-
tomy, physiology, and developmental biology
will be surveyed. An introduction to micro-
biology with emphasis given to host-pathogen
relationships and the immune response. Three
hours of lecture and one three-hour laborato-
ry per week. Not open to students who have
received credit for Biology 13-14.
lO-1 1 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY
An introduction to the study of biology
designed for students planning to major in the
biological sciences. Major topics considered
include the origin of life, cellular respiration
and photosynthesis, genetics, development,
anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior,
and evolution. Three hours of lecture and one
three-hour labortory per week.
13-14 HUMAN ANATOMY
AND PHYSIOLOGY
Using the organ-systems approach, the course
is an introduction to the human body — its
anatomy, physiology, and normal develop-
ment — with particular attention to structure
and function at all levels of its biological
organization (molecular through organismal).
Three hours of lecture, one hour of discus-
sion, and one three-hour lab per week. Prere-
quisite: Chemistry 15 or Chemistry 20 or
consent of instructor.
21 MICROBIOLOGY
A study of microogranisms. Emphasis is
given to the identification and physiology of
microorganisms as well as to their role in
disease, their economic importance, and
industrial applications. Three hours of lecture
and two two-hour laboratory periods per
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Not open
to students who have received credit for Biolo-
gy 26.
22 GENETICS
A general consideration of the principles gov-
erning inheritance, including treatment of
classical, molecular, cytological. physiologi-
cal, microbial, human, and population gene-
tics. Three hours of lecture and nvo two-hour
laboralorv periods per week. Prerequisite:
Biology 10-11.
23 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY
The mechanisms and functions of animal svs-
27
lenis. including the autonomic, endocnne.
digestive, cardio-vascular, respiratory, renal,
nervous, and reproductive systems. Mamma-
lian physiology is stressed. Three hours of
lecture and one three-hour laboratory per
week. Prerequisite: Biology lO-l I .
24 ECOLOGY
The study of the principles of ecology with
emphasis on the role of chemical, physical,
and biological factors affecting the distribu-
tion and succession of plant and animal popu-
lations and communities. Included will be
field studies of local habitats as well as labo-
ratory experimentation. Two hours of lecture
and one four-hour laboratory per week. Pre-
requisite: Biology 10-1 1.
25 PLANT SCIENCES
A survey of the structure, development, func-
tion, classification, and use of plants and
related organisms. The study will comprise
four general topic areas: form, including mor-
phology and anatomy of plants in growth and
reproduction; function, concentrating on
nutrition and metabolism peculiar to photo-
synthetic organisms; classification systems
and plant identification, and human uses of
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three-
hour laboralon per week. Prerequisite: Biol-
ogy 10-11.
26 MICROBIOLOGY FOR THE
HEALTH SCIENCES
A study of microorganisms with emphasis
given to their taxonomy and their role in
various aspects of human infectious disease.
Mechanisms for treating and preventing
infectious diseases will be presented. Labora-
tory to include diagnostic culture procedures,
antibiotic sensitivity testing, serology, anaer-
obic techniques and a study of hemolytic
reactions. Three hours of lecture and four
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisites:
one year of introductory level biology, one
year of chemistry or consent of instructor. Not
open to students who have received credit for
Biology 21.
28 AQUATIC BIOLOGY
A field-oriented course dealing with freshwa-
ter ecosystems. Studies will include a survey
of the plankton . benthos, and fish — as well as
the physical and chemical characteristics of
water that influence their distribution. Several
local field trips and a one-week trip to a field
station will familiarize students with thediver-
sity of habitats and the techniques of limnolo-
gists. May term onl\. Prerequisites: Biology
10-11.
.10 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY
OF VERTEBRATES
Detailed examination of the origins, structure,
and functions of the principal organs of the
vertebrates Special attention is given to the
progressive modification of organs from low-
er to higher vertebrates Three hours of lecture
and one four-hour laboratory per week. Pre-
requisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years.
31 HISTOLOGY
A study of the basic body tissues and the
microscopic anatomy of the organs and struc-
tures of the body which are formed from them.
Focus is on norma! human histology. Three
hours of lecture and one four-hour laboratory
per week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11 . Alter-
nate years.
32 PLANT AND
GREENHOUSE MANAGEMENT
A course concerned with the care of house-
plants and the management of small green-
houses. Class time will include lectures, dis-
cussions, demonstrations, greenhouse
exercises, and field trips to local greenhouses.
Topics will include the theoretical and practi-
cal aspects of the care and feeding, propaga-
tion, light and water requirements, and dis-
ease control for many of the common house
and greenhouse plants. Prerequisite: Biology
1-2 or 10-11. May term only.
33 ECONOMIC AND
SYSTEMATIC BOTANY
Structure and classification of plants with
emphasis on those species, particularly food
and drug plants, having significance for
human affairs. Three hours of lecture and one
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequis-
ites: Biology 10-11. Biology 25. Alternate
years.
-34 INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
Comparative study of the invertebrate phyla
with emphasis on phylogeny, physiology,
morphology, and ecology. Two three-hour
lecture! laboratory periods per week. Prere-
quisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years.
35 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY
Physicochemical background of cellular
function: functions of membrane systems and
organelles; metabolic pathways; bio-chemical
and cellular bases of growth, development and
responses of organisms Three hours of lec-
ture and one three-hour laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 10-1 1 and a year of
chemistry. Alternate years.
39 MEDICAL GENETICS
This course is concerned with the relation-
ships of heredity to disease. Discussions will
focus on topics such as chromosomal abnor-
malities, metabolic variation and disease,
somatic cell genetics, genetic screening, and
immunogenetics. Laboratory exercises will
offer practical experiences in genetic diag-
nostic techniques. Prerequisite: Biology 1-2
or 10-11. May term only.
40 PARASITOLOGY AND
MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY
The biology of parasites and parasitism.
Studies on the major groups of animal para-
sites and anthropod vectors of disease will
involve taxonomy and life cycles. Emphasis
will be made on parasites of medical and
veterinary importance. Three hours of lecture
and one three-hour laboratory per week. Pre-
requisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years.
41 VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY
A study of the development of vertebrates
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus.
Particular attention is given to the chick and
human as representative organisms. Two
three-hour lectureHaboratory periods per
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-1 1 . Alternate
42 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR
A study of the causation, function, evolution,
and biological significance of animal beha-
viors in their normal environment and social
contexts. Three hours of lecture and one
four-hour laboratory each week. Prerequis-
ite: Biology lO-l I. Alternate years.
44 BIOCHEMISTRY
Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car-
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, and
nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; and
biochemical control mechanisms, including
allosteric control, induction, repression, as
well as the various types of inhibilive control
mechanisms. Three hours of lecture, one
three-hour laboratory and one hour of
arranged work per week. Prerequisite:
Chemistry 20-21 or Chemistry 15. or consent
of instructor. Cross-listed as Chemistry 44.
Alternate years.
45 RADIATION BIOLOGY
A study of the effects of ionizing and non-
ionizing irradiations on cells, tissues and
organisms. Consideration will be given to
repair mechanisms and how repair deficien-
cies elucidate the nature of irradiation dam-
age. Three hours of lecture and one three-
hour lab per week. Prerequisites: Biology
10-11. one year of chemistry. Alternate years.
46 PLANT ANATOMY
AND PHYSIOLOGY
A study of plant physiology as a function of
plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships and
environmental factors will be examined from
a background of the structure and develop-
ment of cells, tissues, organs, and whole
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three-
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites:
Biology 10-11. Biology 25. Alternate years.
47 IMMUNOLOGY
The course introduces concepts concerning
28
how pathogens cause disease and host defense
mechanisms agamst infectious diseases.
Characterization of and relationships between
antigens, haptens, and antibodies are pre-
sented. Serological assays will include:
agglutination precipitations, immunofluores-
cence. Immunoelectrophoresis, and comple-
ment fixation. Other topics are: immediate
and delayed hypersensitivities (i.e. allergies
such as hay fever and poison ivy), immuno-
logical renal diseases, immunohematology
(blood groups, etc.). the chemistry and func-
tion of complement autoimmunity, and organ
graft rejection phenomena. Three hours of
lecture, one ihree-hour laboratory, and one
hour of arranged work per week. Prerequis-
ite: Biology 10-11 . Alternate years.
48 ENDOCRINOLOGY
This course begins with a survey of the role of
the endocrine hormones in the integration of
body functions. This is followed by a study of
the control of hormone synthesis and release,
and a consideration of the mechanisms by
which hormones accomplish their effects on
target organs. Two three-hour lecture!
laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite:
Biology 10-11. Alternate years.
49 BIOLOGY COLLOQUIUM
This course offers the student a chance to
become familiar with research in the Biologi-
cal Sciences using techniques such as meeting
and talking with active researchers, reading
and critically analyzing the current literature,
and discussing the ideas and methods shaping
Biology. Students will be required to read and
analyze scientific papers, actively participate
in discussions, and. in the senior year, present
the results of a literature survey or of individu-
al research. Students majoring in this depart-
ment are required to enroll during all semes-
ters spent on campus in the junior and senior
years. A letter grade will be given in a semes-
ter when the student gives a lecture; in other
semesters the grade will be S/U. Non-credit
course. One hour per week. Prerequisites:
Biology majors with junior or senior class
standing.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Recent samples of internships in the depart-
ment include ones with the Department of
Environmental Resources, nuclear medicine
or rehabilitative therapies at a local hospital.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Departmental studies are experimentally
oriented and may entail either lab or field
work.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
Examples of recent honors projects have
involved stream analysis, gypsy moth
research, drug synthesis and testing.
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Professor: Hollenback
Associate Professor: Weaver
(Chairperson)
Assistant Professors: Gordon
Lecturer: Larrabee
To graduate with a major in business
administration, a student must complete
one of two tracks:
Track I — Business Management
This track is designed to train students
in the functions of today's profit and
nonprofit organizations. The program
provides a well-balanced preparation for
a wide variety of careers, including gen-
era! administration, personnel adminis-
tration, commercial banking, invest-
ments and portfolio management,
security analysis, corporate financial
management, general marketing, sales,
product management, advertising, retail
merchandising, and production and man-
ufacturing management.
Required courses are Business 10, 11,
23, 28-29, 38, 39, 40. and 41, and
Mathematics 13. Business 32 or 43 may
be substituted for Business 29, and Busi-
ness 33 may be substituted for Business
39. Accounting JO may be substituted for
Business 10 if the student is transferring
into the business administration major,
but duplicate credit will not be granted.
Majors are also urged to enroll in Eco-
nomics 10 and 1 1, Business 35 and 36,
Mathematics 12, and Computer Science
15. Majors also are encouraged to take a
foreign language. The additional elective
offerings are intended to add depth in the
areas of finance, marketing, and man-
agement.
Track II — Management Science
This track is designed to train students
in the quantitative aspects of business
administration. It provides excellent
undergraduate preparation for graduate
study in management science, operations
research, and quantitative business
administration. The program also pro-
vides a solid preparation for careers in
production control, systems analysis,
research, forecasting, industrial and
technical sales and any of the functional
areas of business where quantitative
training would be an added qualification.
Required courses are Business 10. 11.
23. 38, 39, 46: Economics 10. 11, 41:
Mathematics 18-19. 12, 13. 38, and
Computer Science 15. Accounting 10
may be substituted for Business 10 if the
student is transferring into the business
administration major.
10 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
An introduction to the art of measuring, com-
municating, and interpreting financial activi-
ty. Recording, classifying and summarizing
business transactions, the interpretation of
accounts, and the preparation of financial
statements are studied. Not open to students
who have received credit for Accounting 10.
1 1 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING
An introduction to the various components of
managerial accounting. Emphasis is placed on
managerial problem solving techniques and
the analysis of the results. Accounting sys-
tems, costing procedures, cost-volume profit
relationships, managerial control processes
and the use of computers as aids to decision
making are studied. Students will gain hands-
on experience w ith various computer applica-
tions of managerial accounting. Prerequisite:
Business 10 or Accounting 10.
23 QUANTITATIVE
BUSINESS ANALYSIS
Techniques of quantitative analysis useful in
making business decisions. Topics include:
decision theory, inventory models, network
models, forecasting, and other selected appli-
cations. Students will be introduced to com-
puter applications of the quantitative models.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 13 or consent of
instructor.
28-29 MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Planning, organization, and control of the
distribution activities of the firm, and an anal-
ysis and evaluation of the marketing system,
its institutions, and processes. Application of
marketing principles and the development of
strategies for specific marketing problems.
Product, channel fiow. promotion, and pric-
ing strategies explored. Readings, cases, and
games.
32 ADVERTISING
Nature, scope, methods, and effects of prom-
29
otion. Techniques of analysis and control in
the use of advertising and publicity as tools in
developing business strategy.
33 INVESTMENTS
An introduction to the financial sector of the
economy and the structure and functions of
financial markets and the agencies involved;
brokerage houses and stock exchanges; the
various types of investments available. Tech-
niques used to evaluate financial securities.
Also covered are recent developments in
investment theory.
35 LEGAL PRINCIPLES I
Lectures and analysis of cases on the nature,
sources, and fundamentals of the law in gener-
al, and particularly as relating to contracts,
agency, and negotiable instruments. Open
only to juniors and seniors.
36 LEGAL PRINCIPLES II
Lectures on the fundamentals and history of
the law relating to legal association, real prop-
erty, wills, and estates. Open only to juniors
and seniors.
38 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT I
An introduction to working capital manage-
ment and financial analysis and planning.
Topics are covered through readings, cases
and problem solving in the areas of decisions
on current asset and liability structures, cash
and marketable securities, accounts receiv-
ables, inventory management and control,
spontaneous financing, short-term borrowing,
ratio and financial statement analysis, source
and use statements, cash flow forecasting, and
financial statements forecasting. Prerequis-
ites: Mathematics 13. Business 10, II. and
23. or consent of instructor.
39 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT II
A study of capital asset structure and long-
term financial decisions. Topics are covered
through readings, cases, and problem solving
in the areas of capital budgeting, including
risk and required rates of return, leveraging
the firm, concepts of capital structures,
dividend policy, external financing, term and
lease financing, long-term debt, equity sec-
urities, convertible securities and warrants.
Prerequisite: Business iS or consent of
instructor.
40 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
Structural characteristics and functional rela-
tionships of a business organization as well as
the problems encountered in coordinating the
internal resources of a firm. Emphasis on
administrative efficiency and procedures.
41 BUSINESS POLICIES
Planning, organization, and control of busi-
ness operations; setting of goals; coordination
of resources, development of policies. Analy-
sis of strategic decisions encompassing all
areas of a business . and the use and analysis of
control measures. Emphasis on both the inter-
nal relationship of various elements of pro-
duction, finance, marketing, and personnel,
and the relationship of the business entity to
external stimuli. Readings, cases, and games.
Prerequisites: Business 23. 28-29. 38-39.
and 40. or consent of instructor. Seniors only.
42 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT
An introduction to the managenal problems of
recruiting, selecting, training, and retraining
the human resources of the firm. Emphasis is
placed on the interrelationship of personnel
policies with management objectives and phi-
losophies in such areas as fringe benefits,
wage and salary policies, union activities, and
health and safety.
43 RETAIL MANAGEMENT I
Planning, organization, and control of the
retailing firm. Competitive strategy develop-
ment through store location, layout, adminis-
tration organization, buying, and pricing.
Cases, readings, and papers.
45 MARKETING RESEARCH
This is a study of the principles and practices
of Marketing Research. The focus is on the
development and application of Marketing
Research Studies. Topics covered include
selection of a research design, project plan-
ning and scheduling, data specification and
gathering, quantitative methods to analyze
data, interpretation of data, and research
report wnting. Readings, cases, and research
project. Prerequisite: Mathematics 13. Busi-
ness 28. or consent of instructor.
46 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
An introduction to the planning, organization,
and controlling of operations in a production
facility. The course also incorporates quanti-
tative techniques and computer applications
used in the production and operations manage-
ment environment. Topics include capacity
and layout planning, facility location analysis,
job design and work measurement, production
scheduling, materials requirement planning
models, and quality controls. Students will
engage in the actual design of an inventory
status file and MRP system. Prerequisites:
Business 23 or consent of instructor.
47 CREATIVE ADVERTISING
A workshop concerned with theme, copy, and
effective presentation of advertisements for
print media, radio, and direct mail. Primarily
an exploration of creativity through analysis
of works of artists and writers with application
to practical advertising, and tailored to the
interests of individual students. May term.
48 SALES SEMINAR
The role of selling in the economy. The art of
creative selling; application of theories from
the behavioral sciences to selling through the
analysis of sales situations and techniques.
49 MANAGING THE
SMALL BUSINESS
How the potential businessman proceeds in
establishing, operating, and profiting from a
small business operation. Considered and
analyzed are such aspects as marketing, man-
aging, financing, promoting, insuring, estab-
lishing, developing, and staffing the small
retail, wholesale service, and manufacturing
firm. May term.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Typical examples are marketing analysis for a
paper products firm, planning a branch store,
hotel and real estate management, banking
and insurance.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Examples of recent studies are; the economic
impact of a college on a community; a mark-
eting strategy for a local firm enlerting the
consumer market.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
A recent project was a study of the evolution
of anti-trust legislation in the United States.
CHEMISTRY
Professors: Hummer. Radspinner
Associate Professor: Franz
(Chairperson)
Part-time Instructor: Baggett
A major in chemistry consists of
Chemistry 10-11. 20-21. 30-31, 32 and
33; Physics 25-26: Mathematics 18. 19
and one of the following courses: Mathe-
matics 1 3 , 20. 2 1 , 32 , or Computer Sci-
ence 15. Mathematics 20 and 21 and
French or German are strongly recom-
mended for students planning on gradu-
ate study in chemistry. To be certified in
secondary education, chemistry majors
must also pass two biology courses num-
bered 10 or higher.
A minor in Chemistry requires com-
pletion of four courses numbered 20 or
higher; at least one must be taken from
each of the following groups: Group A
(20, 21,40, 41, 44, 45) and Group B (26
30
or 32, 30, 3 1 , 33. 39, 43). Named minors
in specialized ares may be designed by
students with departmental approval.
8 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES
An introduction to the principles of inorganic
chemistry. Topics include atomic and
molecular structure, nomenclature, gases,
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equili-
brium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiomet-
ry. The approach is primarily descriptive,
with illustrations drawn mostly from the
health sciences. Along with Chemistry 15.
this course is designed for those students who
require only two semesters of chemistry, and
is not intended for students planning to enroll
in chemistry courses numbered 20 or above.
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, and
one three-hour laboratory period each week.
Prerequisite: high school algebra or Math 5.
Not open for credit to students who have
received credit for Chemistry 10.
10 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I
A quantitative introduction to the concepts
and models of chemistry. Topics include
stoichiometry. atomic and molecular struc-
ture, nomenclature, bonding, thermochemi-
stry, gases, solutions, and chemical reactions.
The laboratory introduces the student to
methods of separation, purification, and iden-
tification of compounds according to their
physical properties. This course is designed
for students who plan to major in one of the
sciences. Three hours lecture, one hour dis-
cussion and one three-hour laboratory period
each week. Prerequisite: placement in Chem-
istry 10 is determined in part by a student's
score on the mathematics placement e.xami-
nation. Not open for credit to students who
have received credit for Chemistry 8. except
by permission of the Chemistry Department.
1 1 GENERAL CHEMISTRY II
A continuation of Chemistry 10. with empha-
sis placed on the foundations of analytical,
inorganic, and physical chemistry. Topics
include kinetics, general and ionic equilibria,
acid-base theory, electrochemistry, ther-
modynamics, nuclear chemistry, coordination
chemistry, and descriptive inorganic chemis-
try of selected elements. The laboratory treats
aspects of quantitative and qualitative inor-
ganic analysis. Three hours lecture, one hour
discussion, and one three-hour laboratory
period each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 10
or consent of the Chemistry Department.
15 BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
A descriptive study of the compounds of car-
bon. This course will illustrate the pnnciples
of organic chemistry with material relevant to
students in medical technology, biology,
nursing, forestry, education and the humani-
ties. Topics include nomenclature, alkanes.
arenes. functional denvatives. amino acids
and proteins, carbohydrates and other natur-
ally occurring compounds. This course is
designed for students who require only one
semester of organic chemistry. Three hours
lecture, one hour discussion, and one four-
hour laboratory period each week. Prere-
quisite: Chemistry 8 or 10. Not open for credit
to students who have received credit for
Chemistry 20.
20-21 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
A systematic study of the compounds of car-
bon, including both aliphatic and aromatic
series. The laboratory work introduces the
student to simple fundamental methods of
organic synthesis, isolation, and analysis.
Three hours lecture and one four-hour labo-
ratory period each week. Prerequisite:
Chemistry II.
26 CLINICAL ANALYSIS
A presentation of selected wet-chemical and
instrumental methods of quantitative analysis
with an orientation toward clinical applica-
tions in medical technology. Topics include:
general methods and calculations; solutions;
titrations; photometric analyses (colorimetric,
atomic absorption, flame emmision); electro-
chemical methods (ion-selective electrodes,
coulometry). automation. Lecture, recitation,
and laboratory daily. Prerequisite: Chemistry
10-11 or consent of instructor. May not be
taken for credit following Chemistry 32. May
term only.
30-31 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
A study of the fundamental principles of
theoretical chemistry and their applications.
The laboratory work includes techniques in
physicochemical measurements. Three hours
lecture and one four-hour laboratory period
each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 11.
Mathematics 19. and one year of physics or
consent of instructor.
32 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY
A study of the fundamental methods of gra-
vimetric, volumetric, and elementary instru-
mental analysis together with practice in labo-
ratory techniques and calculations of these
methods. Two hours lecture and mo three-
hour labortory periods each week. Prerequis-
ite: Chemistry 1 1 or consent of instructor.
33 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
A study of modem theories of atomic and
molecular structure and their relationship to
the chemistry of selected elements and their
compounds. Three hours lecture and one
four-hour laboratory period each week. Pre-
requisite: Chemistry 30. Mathematics 19. and
one year of physics or consent of instructor.
39 INTRODUCTION TO
QUANTUM MECHANICS
After presenting the origin, basic concepts,
and formulation of quantum mechanics with
emphasis on its physical meaning, the free
particle, simple harmonic oscillator, and
central-force problems will be investigated.
Both time-independent and time-dependent
perturbation theory will be covered. The eleg-
ant operator formalism of quantum mechanics
will conclude the course. Four hours of lec-
ture and recitation. Prerequisites: Mathema-
tics 21 . either Chemistry 31 or Physics 26.
and consent of instructor. Cross-listed as
Physics 48.
40 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Selected topics, which may include mechan-
isms of organic reactions, synthesis, detailed
structure and chemistry of natural products,
polynuclear hydrocarbons, and aromatic
heterocyclics. Three hours lecture. Prere-
quisite: Chemistry 21 .
41 QUALITATIVE ORGANIC ANALYSIS
Theory and application of the systematic
identification of pure organic compounds and
mixtures. Two hours lecture and nvo three-
hour laboratory periods each week. Prere-
quisite: Chemistry 21 .
43 ADVANCED
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY
A study of advanced analytical methods with
emphasis on chromatographic, electrochemi-
cal, and spectroscopic methods of instrumen-
tal analysis. Three hours lecture and one
four-hour laboratory period each week. Pre-
requisite: Chemistry 31 and 32 or consent of
instructor.
44 BIOCHEMISTRY
Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car-
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, and
nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; and
biochemical control mechanisms, including
allosteric control, induction, repression as
well as the various types of inhibitive control
mechanisms. Prerequisite: Chemistry 21 or
IS or consent of instructor. Cross-listed as
Biology 44.
45 SPECTROSCOPY AND
MOLECULAR STRUCTURE
Theory and practice of molecular structure
determination by spectroscopic methods.
Three hours lecture. Pre- or co-requisites:
Chemistry 31 . 33. or consent of instructor.
48 CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM
A seminar in which faculty, students, and
invited professional chemists discuss their
own reseach activities or those of others which
have appeared in recent chemical literature.
Prerequisite: Three semesters of non-credit
31
Chemistry Colloquium taken during the junior
and senior years.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
The student will ordinarily work under super-
vision in an industrial labortory and submit a
wntlen report on his project.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
The student will ordinarily work on a laborato-
ry research project and will write a thesis on
his work.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
The student will ordinarily work on a laborato-
ry research project with emphasis being on the
student's showing initiative and making a
scholarly contribution. A thesis will be writ-
ten.
CRIMINAL JUSTICE
Assistant Professor: Strauser
(Coordinator)
This major is designed to acquaint
students with the American criminal jus-
tice system and to provide an under-
standing of the social, psychological,
philosophical, and political contexts
within which the system of criminal jus-
tice functions. Its aim is to develop stu-
dents" intellectual and scientific skills in
raising and attempting to answer impor-
tant questions about the system of justice
and its place in society. The program
offers opportunity for intern experience
in the field, and prepares for careers in
the areas of law enforcement, probation
and parole, prisons, and treatment ser-
vices.
The major has two tracks. Track I
prepares for careers in law enforcement.
Track II prepares for careers in correc-
tions.
Track I — Law Enforcement.
The major consists of 10 courses, dis-
tributed as follows:
A. Professional courses in criminal
justice (three courses)
Introduction to the Criminal Justice
System (Sociology and Anthropolo-
gy 15)
Introduction to Law Enforcement
(Sociology and Anthropology 23)
The American Prison System
(Sociology and Anthropology 39)
B. Courses in the social, psychological,
philosophical, and political context
of the justice system (seven courses)
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro-
pology 30) and either Juvenile Delin-
quency (Sociology and Anthropolo-
gy 21) or Racial and Cultural
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro-
pology 34) (two courses)
Anthropology 34 (two courses)
Abnormal Psychology
(Psychology 16) (one course)
America as a Civilization (American
Studies 10), Afro- American History
(History 28) or United States Social
and Intellectual History Since 1877
(History 43) (one course)
Law and Society (Political Science
35) and Civil Rights and Liberties
(Political Science 31) (two courses)
Philosophical Issues in Criminal Jus-
tice (Philosophy 18) (one course)
C. Internship or practicum in law enfor-
cement. (Recommended but not
required for the major)
Track II — Corrections.
The major consists of 10 courses, dis-
tributed as follows:
A. Professional courses in criminal
justice (three courses)
Introduction to the Criminal Justice
System (Sociology and Anthropolo-
gy 15)
The American Prison System
(Sociology and Anthropology 39)
Introduction to Human Services
(Sociology and Anthropology 22)
B. Courses in the social, psychological,
philosophical, and political context
of the justice system (seven courses)
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro-
pology 30) and either Juvenile Delin-
quency (Sociology and Anthropolo-
gy 21) or Racial and Cultural
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro-
pology 34) (two courses)
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology
16) (one course)
America as a Civilization (American
Studies 10), Afro-American History
(History 28) or United States Social
and Intellectual History Since 1877
(History 43) (one course)
Law and Society (Political Science
35) and Civil Rights and Liberties
(Political Science 31) (two courses)
Philosophical Issues in Criminal Jus-
tice (Philosophy 18) (One course)
C. Internship or practicum in correc-
tions. (Recommended but not
required for the major). Prerequis-
ites: Mathematics 13, Psychology
31 , and Psychology 39. These prere-
quisites may be waived in certain
cases by the coordinating committee.
Majors should seek advice concerning
course selection from members of the
coordinating committee and should note
course prerequisites in planning their
programs.
ECONOMICS
Professors: Opdahl (Chairperson),
Rabold
The major has two tracks. Track I is
designed for the student whose primary
interest lies in business management;
Track II is designed for students with an
interest in graduate work, teaching, gov-
ernment or non-business careers, and for
those with less well-defined interests.
Track I — Managerial Economics
requires: Economics 10, 1 1, 32, and 41;
Business 10-1 1 or Accounting 10 and 20;
Business 38 and 39, plus two electives
from Economics 20, 3 1 , 35, 37, 43, and
Business 40. Business 33 (Investments)
may be substituted for Business 39
(Financial Management II).
Track II — Political Economy
requires: Economics 10, 11, 30. 31,40,
and five electives of which three must be
in economics and two in political sci-
ence, all selected with the advice and
consent of the student's adviser or
department chairperson. Economics 41
(Managerial Economics) may be substi-
tuted for Economics 30 (Intermediate
Microeconomics).
32
In addition, the following courses are
recommended: all majors — Math 13
and Business 23; majors planning gra-
dute work — Math 12-18: Track II
majors — Business 10-1 1.
A minor in Economics requires the
completion of Economics 10 and 1 1 and
three other economics courses numbered
20 or above, selected by the student with
prior approval of the department chair-
person.
2 CONSUMER ECONOMICS
A course in "family" or "practical" eco-
nomics, designed to teach students how they
and their families can be intelligent consum-
ers: that is, how they can spend, save, and
borrow so as to maximize the value they
receive for the income they have. Treats sub-
jects such as intelligent shopping; the uses and
abuses of credit; investing savings; buying
insurance, automobiles, and houses; medical
care costs; estates and wills, etc. Alternate
years.
10 PRINCIPLES OF
POLITICAL ECONOMY I
Macroeconomics. Deals with problems of the
economic system as a whole. What influences
the level of national income and employment?
What is inflation and why do we have it? What
is the role of government in a modem capita-
listic system? How does business organize to
produce the goods and services we demand?
How are the American financial and banking
systems organized? What is the nature of
American unionism? What are the elements of
government finance and fiscal policy?
1 1 PRINCIPLES OF
POLITICAL ECONOMY II
This course focuses upon microeconomics
and selected current economic problems. It
deals with the relatively small units of the
economy such as the firm and the family.
Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses how
business firms decide what and how much to
produce and how goods and services are
priced in different types of markets. Also
considers such problems as economic growth,
international trade, poverty, discrimination,
ecology, and alternative economic systems.
20 MONEY AND BANKING
Covers business fluctuations and monetary
and fiscal policy; the financial organization of
society; the banking system; credit institu-
tions; capital markets, and international finan-
cial relations. Prerequisite: Economics 10 and
11.
22 ECONOMIC SYSTEMS OF THE WEST
(CAPITALISM AND SOCIALISM)
A comparative analysis of the underlying
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the per-
formance of selected economic systems extant
in the West. Alternate years.
23 SOVIET-TYPE ECONOMICS
An analysis of the ideologies, institutions, and
performance of Soviet-type economics, with
emphasis upon Marxian theory and the eco-
nomy of the U . S S . R. ; comparison of selected
Eastern European and Chinese approaches to
communism. Alternate years.
24 URBAN PROBLEMS
The application of economic theory to the
study of significant social, political, and eco-
nomic problems associated with urbanization,
including poverty, employment, education,
crime, health, housing, land use and the envi-
ronment, transportation, and public finance.
Analysis of solutions offered. ;4/rfrna/ev<'ari.
25 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS
A study of the relationship between environ-
mental decay and economic growth, with par-
ticular reference to failures of the price and
property-rights systems; application of cost/
benefit analysis, measures aimed at the crea-
tion of an ecologically viable economy. Alter-
nate years.
30 INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS
An advanced analysis of contemporary theory
regarding consumer demand, production costs
and theory, profit maximization, market
structures, and the determinants of returns to
the factors of production. Prerequisites: Eco-
nomics 10 and II. Alternate years.
31 INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS
An advanced analysis of contemporary theory
and practice with regard to business fluctua-
tions, national income accounting, the deter-
mination of income and employment levels,
and the use of monetary and fiscal policy.
Prerequisites: Economics 10 and II. Alter-
nate years.
32 GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY
An analytical survey of government's efforts
to maintain competition through antitrust
legislation; to supervise acceptable cases of
private monopoly through public utility reg-
ulation and via means of regulatory commis-
sions, and to encourage or restrain various
types of private economic activities. Prere-
quisites: Economics 10 and 1 1 or consent of
instructor.
35 LABOR PROBLEMS
The history of organized labor in the United
States, including the structure of unions,
employers' opposition to unions, the role of
government in labor-management relations,
the economic impact of unions. Alternate
\ears.
37 PUBLIC FINANCE
An analysis of the fiscal economics of the
public sector, including the development,
concepts, and theories of public expenditures,
taxation, and debt at all levels of American
government. Includes also the use of fiscal
policy as an economic control device. Prere-
quisites: Economics 10 and II or consent of
instructor.
40 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT
A discussion of the origins, development, and
significance of the economic ideas embodied
in the works of Smith, Marx, Schumpeter.
Keynes, and others. Prerequisites: Econom-
ics 10 and 1 1 or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.
41 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
The application of economic theory and
methodology to the solution of business prob-
lems. Subjects include: optimizing tech-
niques, risk analysis, demand theory, produc-
tion theory, cost theory, linear programming,
capital budgeting, market structures, and the
theory of pricing. Prerequisites: Economics
10 and II.
43 INTERNATIONAL TRADE
A study of the principles, theories, develop-
ment, and policies concerning international
economic relations, with particular reference
to the United States. Subjects covered include:
U.S. commercial policy and its development,
international trade theory, tariffs and other
protectionist devices, international monetary
system and its problems, balance of payments
issues. Alternate years. Prerequisites: Eco-
nomics 10 and II.
45 DEVELOPMENT OF
UNDERDEVELOPED NATIONS
A study of the theories and problems of capital
accumulation, allocation of resources, tech-
nological development, growth, planning
techniques, and institutions and international
relations encountered by the developing
nations. Alternate years.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Typically off campus in business, banking, or
government, supervised by assigned employ-
ee of sponsoring organization.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Superior students may select independent
study in various courses, particularly in prepa-
ration for graduate school.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
33
EDUCATION
Associate Professor: Keesbury
(Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Conrad
Instructor: Cherrington
Lycoming believes that the liberal arts
provide the best preparation for future
teachers, thus all education students
complete a liberal-arts major in addition
to the certification requirements. Stu-
dents can be certified in elementary edu-
cation or one or more of the following
secondary areas: biology, chemistry.
English, French, general science (with
biology or astronomy/physics tracks),
German, mathematics, physics, social
studies, and Spanish. All teacher-
education programs are approved by the
Pennsylvania Department of Education,
and Pennsylvania certificates are recog-
nized in most other states whether
through reciprocal agreements or by
transcript evaluation.
Education 20 and Psychology 38 are
prerequisites to all other offerings in the
Department of Education. Education 20
should be taken at least two semesters
before the professional semester.
Students seeking elementary certifi-
cation must complete Mathematics 7,
Education 40, 41, 42, and 43 as prere-
quisites to the professional semester
(Education 45, 47, and 48).
Students interested in the teacher-
education program should consult with a
member of the department no later than
the first semester of the sophomore year.
Application for the professional semester
must be made during the Fall Semester of
the junior year. The Department of Edu-
cation will admit to the professional
semester those applicants who are in
good academic standing, have satisfac-
torily completed the participation
requirements, have paid the student
teaching fee, and have received a posi-
tive recommendation based upon: (a)
letters from each student's major depart-
ment, two additional faculty outside the
Department of Education; ( b) a screening
interview conducted by the Education
Department, and (c) a writing sample
from each student applicant. Major
departments have different criteria for
their recommendations. Therefore, stu-
dents should consult with the chairperson
of their major department about those
requirements as soon as they begin to
study for certification.
5 DEVELOPMENTAL SEMINAR
The course focuses on developing reading and
study skills which are useful in college. Read-
ing comprehension, vocabulary building, and
critical reading are especially emphasized.
Study skills, includmg time management,
textbook reading, reading-study systems,
notetakmg. test-taking skills, and library
reference skills are also stressed. Open only to
freshmen who are enrolled in Engish 5 or with
consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit.
20 INTRODUCTION TO
THE STUDY OF EDUCATION
A study of teaching as a profession with
emphasis on the economic, social, political,
and religious conditions which influence
Amencan schools and teachers. Considera-
tion is given to the school environment, the
curriculum, and the children with the intention
that students will examine more rationally
their own motives for entering the profession.
32 INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA
AND COMMUNICATIONS
A study of the value, design, construction,
and application of the visual and auditory aids
to learning. Practical experience in the hand-
ling of audio-visual equipment and materials
is provided. Application of audio-visual tech-
niques. Application of the visual and auditory
aids to learning. Students will plan and carry
out actual teaching assignments utilizing vari-
ous A-V devices.
39 PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM
An examination of the vanous curricula of the
public schools and their relationships to cur-
rent practices. Special attention will be given
to the meaning and nature of the curriculum,
the desirable outcomes of the curriculum,
conflicting and variant conceptions of cum-
cular content, modem techniques of cumcular
construction, criteria for the evaluation of
curricula, the curriculum as a teaching instru-
ment. Emphasis will be placed upon the curri-
culum work within the teaching Tield of each
individual.
40 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS
AND CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
A course designed to consider the pnncipal
means of communication, oral and written,
including both practical and creative uses.
Attention will be given to listening, speaking.
written expression, linguistics and grammar,
spelling, and handwriting. Stress will be
placed upon the interrelatedness of the lan-
guage arts. Children's literature will be
explored as a vehicle for developing creative
characteristics in children and for ensuring an
appreciation of the creative writing of others.
Observation and participation in Greater Wil-
liamsport elementary schools. Prerequisites:
Education 20 and Psychology 38 or consent of
instructor.
41 TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES
IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
Studies and experiences to develop a basic
understanding of the structure, concepts, and
processes of anthropology, economics, geo-
graphy, history, political science, and sociol-
ogy as they relate to the elementary school
social-science curriculum. Practical applica-
tions, demonstrations of methods, and the
development of integrated teaching units
using tests, reference books, films, and other
teaching materials. Observation and partici-
pation in Greater Williamsport elementary
schools. Prerequisites: Education 20 and
Psychology 38 or consent of instructor.
42 TEACHING SCIENCE IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
Science methods and materials interpreting
children's sciencetxperiences and guiding the
development of their scientific concepts. A
study of the science content of the curriculum,
its material, and use. Observation and partici-
pation in Greater Williamsport elementary
schools. Prerequisites: Education 20 and
Psychology 38 or consent of instructor.
43 TEACHING READING IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
A basic course in the philosophy and rationale
for the implementation of an elementary
developmental-reading program from kinder-
garten through sixth grade. Emphasis is upon
designing a reading instructional program
which reflects the nature of the learning pro-
cess and recognizes principles of child deve-
lopment through examination of the princi-
ples, problems, methods, and materials used
in elementary reading programs. Observation
and participation in Greater Williamsport
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Psycholo-
gy 38. Education 20. or consent of instructor .
45 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
The course emphasizes the relationship
between the theoretical studies of physical,
social, and cognitive development and the
elementary classroom environment. Particu-
lar consideration will be given to the appropri-
ate age and developmental level of the stu-
dents with an emphasis upon selection and
utilization of methods in all the elementary
34
subject areas, including art and music. Spe-
cific attention will be given to the develop-
ment of strategies for structuring lesson plans,
for maintaining classroom control, and for
overall classroom management. Direct appli-
cation will be made to the individual student-
teaching experience. Prerequisites: Math 7.
Education 40. 41, 42. and 43. or consent of
instructor.
46 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
A study of materials, methods, and techniques
with emphasis on the student's major. Stress is
placed on the selection and utilization of vis-
ual and auditory aids to learning . Students will
teach demonstration lessons in the presence of
the instructor and the members of the class and
will observe supenor teachers in Greater Wil-
liamsport secondary schools. Prerequisites:
Education 20. Psychology JS. and the partici-
pation experience.
47 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Seminar in the issues, problems, and chal-
lenges encountered by teachers in the Ameri-
can public schools, especially those related to
the student-teaching experience.
48 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Two units. Exceeds state-mandated minimum
requirements. Professional laboratory experi-
ence under the supervision of a selected
cooperating teacher in a public elementary
school in Greater Williamsport. Organizes
learning experiences. Actual classroom
experience.*
49 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Two units. Exceeds slate-mandated minimum
requirements. Professional laboratory experi-
ence under the supervision of a selected
cooperating teacher in a public secondary
school in Greater Williamsport. Organized
learning experience. Emphasis on actual
classroom experience, responsibility in the
guidance program, and out-of-class activi-
ties.*
*Sludent teachers are required to follow the calen-
dar of the school district to which they are assigned ,
ENGLISH
Professor: Van Marter
Associate Professors: Jensen
(Chairperson), Rife
Assistant Professors: Gold,
Moses, Wild
Visiting Instructor: Hartsock
A major consists of nine courses not
including English 3, 5 or 6. These nine
courses must include English 1 7 , 20, 2 1 ,
22, 23. and one from English 35 and 36.
The remaining electives may include
any course from English 12 and above
not already taken to satisfy the preceding
requirements. With the consent of the
Department of English, an appropriate
course from the offerings of other depart-
ments may be substituted for an English
elective.
Majors seeking secondary certifica-
tion in English are required to take Eng-
lish 35 and English 38.
The Department of English partici-
pates with seven others in the American
Studies interdisciplinary major, in which
American literature courses constitute an
important part of the American-arts con-
centration area.
Because of its emphasis on communi-
cation skills, a major or a minor in Eng-
lish is excellent preparation for a wide
range of professions. In addition to pre-
paring students for graduate work or for
teaching, a major or a minor in English
can be valuable for those interested in a
career in law, ministry, publishing, edit-
ing or writing, and business, to name a
few.
Two minors are available in the
Department of English. A minor in
English Literature consists of five litera-
ture courses numbered 12 and above,
three of which must be numbered 20 or
above, and at least one of which must be
numbered 30 or above. With the prior
written consent of the department, one
writing course may be substituted for a
literature course. A minor in Writing
consists of English 16 or 17; 18 and 38;
28 or 37; and a senior practicum in an
extended writing project. At least three
of these courses must be numbered 20 or
above. With prior written consent of the
department, one literature course may be
substituted for a writing course with the
following restriction: 16 or 17 and a
senior practicum are required for the
writing minor.
3 BASIC WRITING AND
COMMUNICATION SKILLS
Intensive practice in using basic grammar and
spelling conventions and in writing sentences,
paragraphs, and essays; major emphasis on
the development and organization of con-
cepts. This course does not substitute for
English 5 or 6 and may not be taken to satisfy
the English distnbution requirement.
5 WORKSHOP IN
DEVELOPMENTAL WRITING
Classroom and laboratory instruction in or-
ganizing and writing the detailed paragraph
and illustrative expository theme, with major
emphasis on spelling, grammar, and sentence
structure. Writing assignments and classroom
exercises designed to ensure mastery of the
student's special problems in basic writing
One-half unit grade of "S " will be assigned
when the student has successfully completed
all of the work in the course. Required of, and
limited to. those who have not been exempted
from English 5.
6 COMPOSITION
Extensive practice in analytical writing. Spe-
cial emphasis on developing the composing
skills needed to articulate and defend a posi-
tion in various situations requiring the use of
written English.
12 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE
An introduction to the study of literature
designed for the general student and utilizing
one of the following approaches: major liter-
ary genres, selected literary masterpieces, or
traditional themes in literature.
16 WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES
Intensive practice in writing and presenting
information to various audiences within the
student's own discipline. Includes training in
the use of graphics and in basic library
research methods. Prerequisites: a grade ofC
or belter in English 6 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.
17 CRITICAL WRITING
Designed to provide intermediate students of
literature with the critical skills necessary for
an understanding of poetry, fiction, drama,
and film. Intensive reading and extensive
practice in writing the critical essay. Required
of English majors.
35
18 NEWSWRITING FOR
THE PRINT MEDIA
Analysis of and practice in the basic forms of
newswriting: the elements of news, lead,
style, and structure. Frequent workshop ses-
sions for detailed critiques and discussion of
student writing. Alternate years.
20 BRITISH LITERATURE I
Literary forms, themes, and authors from the
Anglo-Saxon through the Neo-Classical per-
iods. Such writers as Chaucer. Spenser.
Shakespeare. Milton. Swift. Pope, and John-
son; representative works from Beowulf to
Sterne's Sentimenlal Journey.
21 BRITISH LITERATURE II
Literary movements and authors from the
Romantic Period to the present. Particular
empha.sis on such writers as Blake. Words-
worth. Shelley. Keats. Tennyson. Browning.
Arnold. Hardy. Yeats, Eliot
22 AMERICAN LITERATURE I
Brief survey of American literature and
thought before 1 800. followed by more inten-
sive study of the literature and thought of the
period 1800-1900. Major focus on the works
of Emerson. Thoreau. Poe. Hawthorne. Mel-
ville. Whitman, Dickinson, and Howells.
23 AMERICAN LITERATURE II
Major writers, movements, and tendencies in
American literature during the present cen-
tury. Such forces as naturalism, realism, and
modernism: such writers as James, Dreiser,
Hemingway, Faulkner, Frost, Eliot, and Ste-
vens.
24 THE SHORT STORY
Historical and critical study of the short story.
Consideration of representative examples of
the form with emphasis on American and
European writers of the 19th and 20th centu-
ries.
25 THE NOVEL
Historical study of the development of the
novel from the 18th through the 20th centu-
ries. Novels analyzed both as works of prose
an and as turning points in the development of
the novel. Alternate years.
26 LITERATURE AND FILM
The relationship between the conventions of
literature and lilm with emphasis on examina-
tion of representative literary and film works.
Media comparison to reveal the problems of
adaptation.
28 CREATIVE WRITING WORKSHOP:
FICTION AND POETRY
A beginning course in the theory and practice
of writing fiction and poetry. Students may
concentrate in either genre or both. Alternate
years.
30 ROMANTIC LITERATURE
A study of the major poetry and fiction, plus
some non-fiction prose, written during the
years. 1789-1832. Emphasis on the work of at
least three poets, two novelists, and assorted
prose writers. Alternate years.
31 MODERN FICTION
Study of the novels and short fiction of such
major British and American figures as Con-
rad. Forster. Woolf. Lawrence. Joyce.
Hemingway, Faulkner. Nabokov, and Bel-
low.
32 MODERN POETRY
A study of the poetry written in this century,
beginning with Yeats and Eliot and continuing
through such writers as Frost. Williams.
Moore. Stevens, Auden, Lowell, Roethke,
Thomas, Ginsberg, and Rich. Alternate
years.
33 COMEDY, TRAGEDY, AND
THE MODERN THEATRE
Introduction to the theories of comedy and
tragedy as those theories help us to deepen our
response to the theatre. Major focus on plays,
including musicals, from Ibsen and Shaw to
the present. Alternate years.
34 WOMEN AND LITERATURE
Through an examination — literary, social,
and historical — of selected British and
American literature by women, this course
will seek to identify those elements which
distinguish women's particular contribution to
the literary canon. Alternate years.
35 CHAUCER
A study of the major works with emphasis on
The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and Crisey-
de. Some attention to the traditions out of
which these works arose. Required of majors
seeking secondary certification in English.
Alternate years.
36 SHAKESPEARE
A study of representative plays: comedies,
tragedies, histories, romances. Attention
given to Shakespeare's life and times. Alter-
nate years.
37 PUBLIC RELATIONS AND
PUBLICITY WRITING
Communication and publicity techniques in
the field of public relations focused on writing
for the media. The news and feature release,
newsletter, and house organ. Prerequisite:
English IS or consent of instructor. Alternate
years.
38 LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS
OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
Introduction to methods of analyzing spoken
and written English. Classroom work sup-
ported by weekly tutorials, in which the stu-
dent gains practical experience in identifying
diagnosing, and correcting basic communica-
tions problems. Required of majors seeking
secondary certification in English. Alternate
years.
40 SELECTED WRITERS
An intensive study of no more than three
writers, selected on the basis of student and
faculty interest. Possible combinations
include; Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner;
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser and
Milton; Hawthorne, Melville, and Dickens;
Woolf, Forster, and Lawrence: Joyce and
Yeats. May be repealed for credit if the wri-
ters are different. Alternate years.
41 TOPICS IN LITERATURE
Examination of a literary theme, idea, or
movement as it appears in one or more types of
literature and as it cuts across various epochs.
Possible topics include: American Novelists
and Poets of the Jazz Age and Depression;
Religion and Literature; Gothic Tradition in
American Literature; Realism in the Novel;
Literary Modernism; Literature and Mytholo-
gy; The Hero in Literature. May be repeated
for credit if the topic is different. Alternate
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns typically work off campus in a profes-
sion related to their career interest such as law.
public relations, journalism, and others.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Recent studies include The Arthurian Legend.
Shakespeare's Women, D.H. Lawrence, and
T.S. Eliot: The Social Vision.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
Recent projects include The Creative Process
in Literature and Art and Images of Women in
the I890's.
FOREIGN LANGUAGES
AND LITERATURES
Associate Professors: Flam, Maples,
MacKenzie (Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Barker, Gilmore
Study of foreign languages and litera-
tures offers opportunity to explore
36
broadly the varieties of human experi-
ence and thought. It contributes both to
personal and to international under-
standing by providing competence in a
foreign language and a critical acquain-
tance with the literature and culture of
foreign peoples. A major can serve as
entree to careers in business, industry,
government, publishing, education,
journalism, social agencies, translating,
and writing. It prepares for graduate
work in literature or linguistics and the
international fields of politics, com-
merce, law, health, and area studies.
French, German, and Spanish are
offered as major fields of study. The
major consists of at least eight courses
numbered 10 or above. Majors seeking
teacher certification and students plan-
ning to enter graduate school are advised
to begin study of a second foreign lan-
guage. The department encourages the
development in breadth of programs,
including allied courses from related
fields or a second major, and also indivi-
dual or established interdisciplinary
majors combining interest in several lit-
eratures or area or cross-cultural studies;
for example. International Studies. 20th
Century Studies, the Major in Literature.
Majors, teacher certification candidates,
and all students are encouraged to spend
at least a semester of study abroad by
applying to one of the many programs
available. The department maintains a
file of such programs.
Courses taught in English: Foreign
Languages and Literatures 25, French 28
(Section A) and Spanish 32 (Section A).
Foreign Languages and Literatures
25 CONTINENTAL LITERATURE
A study of such major continental authors as
Cervantes, Dostoevsky, Chekhov, Dante,
Ibsen. Proust. Gide. Kafka. Hesse, Goethe.
Sartre. Camus. Brecht. and lonesco. Works
read in English translation will vary and be
organized around a different theme or topic;
recent topics have been existentialism, mod-
ernism, drama, the Weimar era. and 20th
century Scandinavian and German prose wri-
ters. Prerequisite: None. May be repealed for
credit with consent of instructor. May be
accepted toward the English major with con-
sent of the Department of English.
38 FOREIGN LANGUAGE:
SYSTEMS AND PROCESS
Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool for
language learning and teaching. Discussion
and application of languge teaching tech-
niques, including work in the language labo-
ratory. Designed for future teachers of one or
more languages and normally taken in the
junior year. Students should arrange through
the Department of Education to fulfill in the
same semester the requirements of a partici-
pation experience in area schools. Prerequis-
ite: consent of instructor.
French
A major consists of a minimum of
eight courses numbered 10 or above,
including at least two from 40, 42, 44,
and 46. In addition, all majors who wish
to be certified for teaching must pass
courses 21-22, and Foreign Languages
and Literatures 38 (the latter course with
a C or better).
A minor in French consists of at least
four courses numbered 20 and above.
Courses 10 and 11 may be counted to-
ward the minor, but then the minor must
consist of at least five courses, three of
which must be numbered 20 and above.
1-2 ELEMENTARY FRENCH
The aim of the course is to acquire the funda-
mentals of the language with a view to using
them. Regular practice in speaking, under-
standing, and reading.
10-11 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH
Review and development of the fundamentals
of the language for immediate use in speaking ,
understanding, and reading with a view to
building confidence in self-expression. Prere-
quisite: French 2 or equivalent.
21-22 FRENCH LANGUAGE PRACTICE
Further training in speaking, listening com-
prehension, reading, and writing. Includes
extensive work in grammar. Prerequisite:
French 1 1 or equivalent.
28 MODERN FRANCE
A course designed to familiarize students with
political and social structures and cultural
attitudes in contemporary French society.
Materials studied may include such docu-
ments as newspaper articles, interviews and
sociological surveys, and readings in history,
religion, anthropology, and the arts. Some
attention to the changing education system
and the family and to events and ideas which
have shaped French society. May include
some comparative study of France and the
United States.
English Section: Not applicable toward
satisfying the foreign language distribution
requirement. Prerequisite: none.
French Section: Offers readings, papers,
and interviews in French for students with
sufficient language skill. Can be applied to-
ward the foreign language distribution
requirement. Prerequisite: French 21 or con-
seru of instructor.
40 FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800
Major authors and movements from the
Medieval. Renaissance. Classical and
Enlightenment periods. Includes the chanson
de geste. Villon. Montaigne, Corneille.
Racine, Moliere, Voltaire and Rousseau. Pre-
requisite: French 22 or 28 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
42 FRENCH LITERATURE OF
THE I9TH CENTURY
The dimensions of the Romantic sensibility:
Musset. Hugo, Vigny, Balzac, Stendhal
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry of
Baudelaire, Rimbaud, Verlaine. and Mallar-
me. Prerequisite: French 22 or 28 or consent
of instructor. Alternate years.
44 MODERN FRENCH THEATRE
Major trends in French drama from the turn of
the century to Existentialism and the Theatre
of the Absurd. Giraudoux, Anouilh, Sartre,
Camus, Beckett lonesco. Genet, Adamov.
and others. Prerequisite: French 22 or 28 or
consent of instructor.
46 FRENCH LITERATURE OF
THE 20TH CENTURY
Representative poets and novelists of modem
France. Readings selected from the works of
authors such as Proust. Gide. Aragon. Giono,
Mauriac. Celine. Malraux. Saint-Exupery.
Camus, the "new novelists" (Robbe-Gnllet.
Butor. Sarraute. Le Clezio). and the poetry of
Apollinaire, Valery. the Surrealists (Breton.
Reverdy. Eluard. Char), Samt-John Perse.
Supervielle, Prevert, and others. Some atten-
tion to works of French-speaking African
writers. Prerequisite: French 22 or 28 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
49 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE
Intensive practice for advanced students who
wish to improve further their spoken and writ-
ten French. Includes work in oral comprehen-
sion, phonetics, pronunciation, oral and wnt-
ten composition, and translation.
Prerequisite: one course from French 40. 42.
44. 46 or consent of instructor.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See mdex)
37
Examples of recent studies in French include
translation, existentialism, the classical peri-
od, enlightenment literature, and Saint-
Exupery.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
{See index)
German
A major consists of a minimum of
eight courses numbered 10 or above.
One unit of Foreign Languages and Lit-
eratures 25 may be included in the major
with permission. German 40 or German
47 is required of all majors.
All majors who wish to be certified for
teaching must pass German 33 and 34. In
addition to the eight courses for the major
they must also pass Foreign Languages
and Literatures 38 with a grade of C or
better. All majors are urged to enroll in
History 41. Music 36, Political Science
20 and Theatre 35.
A minor in German consists of at least
four courses numbered 20 and above.
Courses 10 and 1 1 may be counted to-
ward the minor, but then the minor must
consist of at lest five courses, three of
which must be numbered 20 and above.
1-2 ELEMENTARY GERMAN
Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals
of the language with a view to using them.
Regular practice in speaking, understanding,
and reading
1011 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN
Review and development of fundamentals of
the language for immediate use in speaking,
understanding, and reding with a view to
huilding confidence in self-expression. Prere-
quisite: German 2 or equivalent.
2 1 -22 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND
LANGUAGE PRACTICE
A two-semester course designed to review and
develop skills in speaking, listening, writing
and reading Grammar and vocabulary build-
ing are stressed with intensive review, writing
practice and some reading on contemporary
issues in German-speaking countries. As the
course progresses, greater emphasis is placed
on speaking, listening comprehension, and
translation. Some attention is given to the
development of the language and its relation-
ship to English. Prerequisite: German II or
equivalent.
33 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE
AND CIVILIZATION I
Designed to acquaint the student with impor-
tant periods of German literature, representa-
tive authors, and major cultural developments
in Germany. Austria, and Switzerland. The
course deals with literature and culture from
the Early Middle Ages through the 1 8th cen-
tury. Prerequisite: German 22 or consent of
instructor.
34 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE
AND CIVILIZATION II
Designed to acquaint the student with impor-
tant periods of German literature, representa-
tive authors, and major cultural developments
in Germany, Austria, and Switzerland. The
course deals with literature and culture from
the 19th century to the present. Prerequisite:
German 22 or consent of instructor.
40 GOETHE
A study of the life and works of Goethe.
Goethe's significance in the Classical period
and later. Readings in the major works. Prere-
quisite: German 33 or 34 or consent of
instructor.
41 CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA
The development of das klassische Drama
with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe,
Kleist, and Schiller. Prerequisite: German 33
or 34 or consent of instructor.
43 THE NOVELLE
The German Novelle as a genre relating to
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger-
man 33 or 34 or consent of instructor.
45 GERMAN POETRY
A study of selected poets or the poetry of
various literary periods. Possible topics
include: Romantic poetry, Heine, Rilke, and
Benn Prerequisite: German 33 or 34 or con-
sent of instructor.
47 CONTEMPORARY GERMAN
LITERATURE
Representative poets, novelists and dramatists
of contemporary Germany, Switzerland and
Austria covering the period from 1945 to the
present. Readings selected from writers such
as: Borchert, Boll, Brechi, Benn, Frisch, Diir-
renmatt, Bichsel. Handke, Walser, Grass and
others. Prerequisite: German 33 or 34 or
consent of instructor.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Examples of recent studies in German include
Classicism, Germanic Mythology, Hermann
Hesse, the dramas of Frisch, and Diirrenmatt.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
Greek
Greek is not offered as a major. An
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan-
guages requires the completion of Greek
21, 22 and Hebrew 21 and 22.
1-2 NEW TESTAMENT GRAMMAR
AND READINGS
Fundamentals of New Testament Greek gram-
mar and readings of selected passages of the
Greek text. Alternate years.
21 READINGS IN THE
SYNOPTIC GOSPELS
A comparative study of the synoptic tradition
in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 2 or equivalent.
Alternate years.
22 READINGS IN THE
PAULINE EPISTLES
Selected readings from the letters of Paul in
Greek. Prerequisite: Greek II or equivalent .
Alternate years.
Hebrew
Hebrew is not offered as a major. An
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan-
guages requires the completion of Greek
21, 22 and Hebrew 21 and 22.
I -2 OLD TESTAMENT GRAMMAR
AND READINGS
Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew
grammar and readings of selected passages of
the Hebrew text. Alternate years.
21 READINGS IN OLD
TESTAMENT NARRATIVE
A critical reading of the Hebrew text of
selected narrative portions of the Old Testa-
ment with special attention being given to
exegetical questions. The text read varies
from year to year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 2 or
equivalent. Alternate years.
22 READINGS IN THE PROPHETIC
BOOKS AND WISDOM LITERATURE
A critical reading of the Hebrew text of
selected portions of Old Testament prophecy
and wisdom literature with special attention
being given to exegetical questions. The text
read varies from year to year. Prerequisite:
Hebrew 21 or equivalent. Alternate years.
Spanish
A major consists of eight courses num-
bered 10 or above. Foreign Languages
and Literatures 38 does not count toward
the major.
All majors who wish to be certified for
teaching in secondary school must pass
38
Foreign Languages and Literatures 38
(grade of C or better) and Spanish 49.
A minor in Spanish consists of at least
four courses numbered 20 and above.
Courses 10 and 1 1 may be counted
toward the minor, but then the minor
must consist of at least five courses, three
of which must be numbered 20 and
above.
1-2 ELEMENTARY SPANISH
Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals
of the language with a view to using them.
Regular practice in speaking, understanding,
and reading.
10-11 INTERMEDIATE SPANISH
Review and development of fundamentals of
the language for immediate use in speaking,
understanding, and reading with a view to
building confidence in self-expression. Prere-
quisite: Spanish 2 or equivalent.
21-22 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND
LANGUAGE PRACTICE
This course consists of a thorough review of
grammar, drills for oral comprehension and
expression, discussion of readings and the
writing of compositions. It is designed to
develop the student's ability to read, write and
converse in Spanish with confidence. Prere-
quisite: Spanish J J or equivalent.
32 HISPANIC CULTURE
To introduce students to the Spanish-speaking
people — their values, customs and institu-
tions, with reference to the geographic and
historical forces governing present-day Spain
and Spanish America. Prerequisite: Spanish
22 or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
33 SURVEY OF SPANISH
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION
Designed to acquaint the student with impor-
tant periods of Spanish literature, representa-
tive authors, and major socio-economic deve-
lopments. The course deals with the literature
from the beginning to the present. Prerequis-
ite: Spanish 22 or consent of instructor . Alter-
nate years.
35 SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION
Designed to acquaint the student with impor-
tant periods of Spanish-American literature,
representative authors, and major socio-
economic developments. The course deals
with the literature, especially the essay and
poetry, from the 16th century to the present.
Prerequisite: Spanish 22 or consent of
instructor. Alternate \ears.
44 SPANISH LITERATURE OF
THE GOLDEN AGE
A study of representative works and principal
literary figures in the poetry, prose, and drama
of the 16th and 17th centuries. Prerequisite:
Spanish 33. 35. or consent of instructor.
45 MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE
Readings of important works of drama, poet-
ry, and prose from the major periods of 19th
and 20th century Spanish and Latin-American
literature. Prerequisite: Spanish 33. 35. or
consent of instructor.
49 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE
Intensive practice for advanced students who
wish to improve further their spoken and writ-
ten Spanish. Includes work in oral com-
prehension, pronunciation, oral and written
composition, and translation. Prerequisite:
One Spanish course at the 30' s level or con-
sent of instructor. Alternate years.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Recent studies include literary, linguistic, and
cultural topics and themes such as urban
problems as reflected in the modem novel.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
HISTORY
Professor: Piper
Associate Professor: Larson
(Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Morris
A major consists of 10 courses,
including 10, 11, and 45. At least seven
courses must be taken in the department.
The following courses may be counted
toward fulfilling the major requirements:
American Studies 10, Political Science
39, Religion 26 and 28. Other appropri-
ate courses outside the department may
be counted upon departmental approval .
For history majors who student teach in
history, the major consists of nine
courses. In addition to the courses listed
below, special courses, independent
study, and honors are available. Special
courses recently taught and anticipated
include a biographical study of European
Monarchs, the European Left, the
Industrialization and Urbanization of
Modem Europe, Utopian Movements in
America, the Peace Movement in Ameri-
ca, The Vietnam War, and American
Legal History. History majors are
encouraged to participate in the intern-
ship program.
Three minors are offered by the
Department of History. The following
courses are required to complete a minor
in Amer/caw ///iron; History 12, 13, and
three courses in American history num-
bered 20 and above. A minor in Euro-
pean History requires the completion of
History 10. 11, and three courses in
European history numbered 20 and
above. To obtain a minor in History
(without national or geographic designa-
tion), a student must complete six
courses in history, of which three must
be chosen from History 10, 11, 12 and 13
and three must be history courses num-
bered 20 and above.
5 SELECTED THEMES IN
WESTERN CIVILIZATION
A survey of the political, economic, social,
and cultural values and institutions in Western
Civilization from the time of classical Greece
to the present. One-half unit of credit. (Not
open to students who have had History 10 and
II).
10 EUROPE 1500-1815
An examination of the political, social, cultur-
al, and intellectual history of Europe and its
relations with other areas of the world from
1500 to 1815.
1 1 EUROPE 1 8 1 5-Present
An examination of the political, social, cultur-
al, and intellectual history of Europe and its
relations with other areas of the world from
1815 to the present.
12 UNITED STATES HISTORY 1607-1877
A study of the men. measures, and move-
ments which have been significant in the
development of the United States between
1607 and 1877. Attention is paid to the prob-
lems of minonty groups as well as to majority
and national influences.
13 UNITED STATES HISTORY
1877-Present
A study of men. measures, and movements
which have been significant in the develop-
ment of the United States since 1877. Atten-
39
tion is paid to the problems of minority groups
as well as to majority and national influences.
20 ANCIENT HISTORY
A study of the ancient western world, includ-
ing the foundations of the western tradition in
Greece, the emergence and expansion of the
Roman state, its experience as a republic, and
its transformation into the Empire. The course
will focus on the social and intellectual life of
Greece and Rome as well as political and
economic changes. Alternate years.
22 MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND
ITS NEIGHBORS
The history of Europe from the dissolution of
the Roman Empire to the mid- 15th century.
The course will deal with the growing
estrangement of western Catholic Europe
from the Byzantium and Islam, culminating in
the Crusades; the rise of the Islamic Empire
and its later fragmentation; the development
and growth of feudalism; the conflict of
empire and papacy, and the rise of the towns.
Alternate years.
23 EUROPE IN THE ERA OF
THE WORLD WARS
An intensive study of the political, economic,
social, and cultural history of Europe from
1 900- 1 945 . Topics include the rise of irration-
alism, the origins of the First World War, the
Communist and Fascist Revolutions, and the
attempts to preserve peace before 1939. Pre-
requisite: History 1 1 or consent of instructor.
24 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE
An intensive study of the political, economic,
social, and cultural history of Europe since
1945. Topics include the post-war economic
recovery of Europe, the Sovietization of East-
em Europe, the origins of the Cold War,
decolonization, and the flowering of the wel-
fare state. Prerequisite. History II or consent
of instructor.
25 FRENCH REVOLUTION
AND NAPOLEON
An analysis of the political, social, and intel-
lectual background of the French Revolution,
a survey of the course of revolutionary deve-
lopment, and an estimate of the results of the
Napoleonic conquests and administration.
Prerequisite: History JO or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
26 COLONIAL AMERICA AND
THE REVOLUTIONARY ERA
The establishment of British settlements on
the American continent, their history as colo-
nies, the causes and events of the American
Revolution, the critical period following inde-
pendence, and proposal and adoption of the
United States Constitution. Alternate years.
27 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES
This course begins with the Progressive Era
and includes the political, economic, and
social developments in the 20th century.
Emphasis will be placed on the domestic and
international demands which have faced the
United States in the period following World
War II.
28 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY
A study of the experiences and participation of
Afro-Americans in the United States. The
course includes historical experiences such as
slavery, abolition, reconstruction, and urbani-
zation. It also raises the issue of the develop-
ment and growth of white racism, and the
effect of this racism on contemporary Afro-
American social, intellectual, and political
life. Alterrmte years.
29 LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY
An examination of the native civilization, the
age of discovery and conquest, Spanish colo-
nial policy, the independence movements,
and the development of modem institutions
and governments in Latin America. Alternate
years.
3 1 HISTORY OF WORLD WAR 11
A comprehensive examination of World War
11 emphasizing the effect of ideological, eco-
nomic, and political forces on the formulation
of military strategy and the conduct of opera-
tion; the nature and extent of the expansion of
government powers; and the experience of
war from the perspective of ordinary civilians
and military alike. Does not count toward
distribution.
33 CONFLICT IN
WESTERN CIVILIZATION
An in-depth study of the changing nature of
war and its relationship to the development of
Western Civilization since the end of the
Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be
placed on the role of war in the development of
the modem nation state and the origins and
nature of total war. Alternate years.
34 DIPLOMATIC HISTORY OF
EUROPE SINCE 1789
A survey of the development of the
European-states system and the relations
between the European states since the begin-
ning of the French Revolution. Prerequisite:
History 1 1 or consent of instructor. Alternate
years.
35 THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND
NATIONALISM, EUROPE 1848-1870
An in-depth investigation of the crucial
"Middle Years" of 19th century Europe from
the revolutions of 1 848 through the unification
of Germany. The course centers on the strug-
gles for power within the major stales of
Europe at this time, and how the vehicle of
nationalism was used to bring about one type
of solution. Alternate years.
37 AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON
The theme of the course is the emergence of
the political and social characteristics that
shaped modem America. The personalities of
Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall. John Ran-
dolph. Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jackson
receive special attention. Special considera-
tion is given to the first and second party
systems, the decline in community cohesive-
ness. the westward movement, and the grow-
ing importance of the family as a unit of social
organization. Alternate years.
38 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION
The problems and events leading to war, the
political and military history of the war, and
the bitter aftermath to the Compromise of
1877.
39 20TH CENTURY
UNITED STATES RELIGION
The study of historical and cultural develop-
ments in American society which relate to
religion or what is commonly called religion.
This involves consideration of the institutional
and intellectual development of several faith
groups as well as discussion of certain prob-
lems, such as the persistence of religious
bigotry and the changing modes of church-
state relationships. Alternate years.
40 HISTORY OF
RENAISSANCE THOUGHT
A study of the classical, humanist, and scho-
lastic elements involved in the development of
the Renaissance outlook on views and values,
both in Italy and in Northem Europe. The
various combinations of social and political
circumstances which constitute the historical
context of these intellectual developments will
be noted. Alternate years.
41 HISTORY OF
REFORMATION THOUGHT
A study of the ideas and systems of ideas
propounded prior to the Reformation, but
which are historically related to its inception,
and of the ideas and systems of ideas involved
in the formulation of the major Reformation
Protestant traditions, and in the Catholic
Reformation. Included are the ideas of the
humanists of the Reformation Era. Alternate
42 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877
A study of the social and intellectual experi-
ence of the United States from its colonial
antecedents through reconstruction. Among
the topics considered are Puritanism, tran-
scendentalism, community life and organiza-
tion, education, and social-reform move-
40
merits. Prerequisites: two courses from
History 12, 13. 28. or consent of instructor.
43 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877
A study of the social and intellectual experi-
ence of the United States from reconstruction
to the present day. Among the topics consid-
ered are social Darwinism, pragmatism, com-
munity life and organization, education and
social reform movements. Prerequisites: mo
courses from History 12. 13, 28. or consent of
instructor.
45 HISTORICAL METHODS
This course focuses on the nature and meaning
of history. It will open to the student different
historical approaches and will provide the
opportunity to explore these approaches in
terms of particular topics and periods. Majors
are required to enroll in this course in either
their junior or senior year. The course is open
to other students who have two courses in
history or consent of instructor.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Typically, history interns work for local gov-
ernment agencies engaged in historical pro-
jects or for the Lycoming County Histoncal
Museum.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Recent topics include studies of the immigra-
tion of American blacks, political dissension
in the Weimer Republic, Indian relations
before the American Revolution, and the his-
tory of Lycoming County.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
INTERNATIONAL STUDIES
Associate Professor: Larson
(Coordinator)
The major is designed to integrate an
understanding of the changing social,
political, and historical environment of
Europe today with study of Europe in its
relations to the rest of the world, particu-
larly the United States. It stresses the
international relations of the North
Atlantic community and offers the stu-
dent opportunity to emphasize either
European studies or international rela-
tions. The program provides multiple
perspectives on the cultural traits that
shape popular attitudes and institutions.
Study of a single country is included as a
data-base for comparisons, and study of
its language, as a basis for direct commu-
nication with its people.
The program is intended to prepare a
student either for graduate study or for
careers which have an international com-
ponent. International obligations are
increasingly assumed by government
agencies and a wide range of business,
social, religious, and educational organi-
zations. Opportunities are found in the
fields of journalism, publishing, com-
munications, trade, banking, advertis-
ing, management, and tourism. The pro-
gram also offers flexible career
preparation in a variety of essential
skills, such as research, data analysis,
report writing, languge skills, and the
awareness necessary for dealing with
people and institutions of another cul-
ture. Preparation for related careers can
be obtained through the guided selection
of courses outside the major in the areas
of business, economics, foreign lan-
guages and literatures, government, his-
tory, and international relations or
through a second major. Students should
design their programs in consultation
with members of the Committee on Inter-
national Studies.
By completing six to eight additional
courses in the social sciences (which
include those courses needed to complete
a major in economics, history, political
science, or sociology/anthropology) and
the required program in eduction, stu-
dents can be certified for the teacher
education program in social studies. By
completing a major in the foreign lan-
guage (five or more courses) and the
education program, students can be certi-
fied to teach that language. The Interna-
tional Studies program also encourages
participation in study-abroad programs,
as well as the Washington and United
Nations semesters.
The major includes 1 1 courses
selected as follows:
International Relations Courses —
Four or two courses (if two, then four
must be taken from Area Courses).
Courses within this group are designed to
provide a basic understanding of the
international system and of Europe's
relations with the rest of the world.
Political Science 25 is required.
Political Science 25: World Politics
Economics 43: International Trade
History 34: European Diplomatic History
Political Science 39: American Foreign
Policy
Area Courses — Four or two courses (if
two, then four must be taken from Inter-
national Relations Courses). Courses
within this group are designed to provide
a basic understanding of the European
political, social, and economic environ-
ment. History 1 1 and Economics 22 are
required.
History II; Europe 1815-Present
Economics 22: Economic Systems of
the West
Political Science 20: European Politics
History 23: Europe in the Era of the
World Wars
History 24: Contemporary Europe
National Courses
Language — Two courses in one lan-
guage.
French 21. plus one course numbered 22 or
above (except 281
German 2 1 , plus one course numbered 22 or
above
Spanish 2 1 , plus one course numbered 22 or
above
Country — One course. The student
must select, according to his or her lan-
guage preparation, one European coun-
try which will serve as a special interest
area throughout the program. The coun-
try selected will serve as the base for
individual projects in the major courses
wherever possible.
France — French 28: Modem France
Germany — History 80: Topics in German
History
Spain — Spanish 32: Hispanic Culture
Elective Course — One course which
should involve further study of some
aspect of the program. Appropriate
courses are any area or international
42
relations courses not yet taken. History
10, 33; Economics 23, 45; Political Sci-
ence 26, 27, 38, 46; related foreign-
literature courses counting toward the
fine-arts requirement and internships.
49 SENIOR SEMINAR
A one-semester seminar, taken in the senior
year, in which students and several faculty
members will pursue an integrative topic in
the field of international studies. Students will
work to some extent independently. Guest
speakers will be invited. The seminar will be
open to qualified persons from outside the
major and the College. Prerequisite: consent
of instructor.
LITERATURE
Associate Professor: Maples
(Coordinator)
This major recognizes literature as a
distinct discipline beyond national
boundaries and combines the study of
any two literatures in the areas of
English, French, German, and Spanish.
Students can thus explore two literatures
widely and intensively at the upper levels
of course offerings within each of the
respective departments while developing
and applying skills in foreign languages.
The major prepares students for graduate
study in either of the two literatures
studied or in comparative literature.
The major requires at least six litera-
ture courses, equally divided between
the two literatures concerned. The six
must be at the advanced level as deter-
mined in consultation with advisers (nor-
mally courses numbered 20 and above in
English and 40 and above in foreign
languages). In general, two of the
advanced courses in each literature
should be period courses. The third
course, taken either as a regular course or
an independent study, may have as its
subject another period, a particular
author, genre, or literary theme, or some
other unifying approach or idea. Beyond
these six, the major must include at least
two additional courses from among those
counting toward a major in the depart-
ments involved. Any prerequisite
courses in the respective departments
(for example: English 6, French 2 1-22 or
28, German 21-22, Spanish 21-22)
should be taken during the freshman
year. Students should design their prog-
rams in consultation with a faculty mem-
ber from each of the literatures con-
cerned. Programs for the major must be
approved by the departments involved.
MASS COMMUNICATION
Instructor: Nason (Chairperson)
The major in mass communication
combines a liberal arts foundation with a
professional sequence through a selec-
tion of courses from the Departments of
Art, Business Administration, English,
Political Science, Psychology, Sociolo-
gy and Anthropology, and Mass Com-
munication. It also draws upon special-
ized courses from the graphic arts
department of the Williamsport Area
Community College. Students complet-
ing the program are qualified to pursue
either career options or graduate study in
mass communication, advertising,
broadcasting, journalism, or public rela-
tions.
Students majoring in mass communi-
cation must complete the Core Curricu-
lum and one sequence, as well as the
College distribution requirements.
A minor in Mass Communication con-
sists of Mass Comm 10 and any four of
the following courses: Mass Comm 1 1 ,
24, 27. 28, 30, 31.
I. THE CORE CURRICULUM
REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS
Two Theory Courses
Mass Comm 10 Introduction to Mass
Communication
Mass Comm 30 Theories of Mass
Communication
A Media Regulation Course
Mass Comm 31 Mass Media Law and
Regulation
A Production Course (Choice of one. Certain
of these courses are required in specific
sequences.)
GCO 51 1 Layout and Design
GCO 512 Typographic Composition
Mass Comm 24 Television Production
A Writing Course (Choice of one. Certain
of these courses are required in specific
sequences.)
Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences
Eng 18 Newswnting for the Print Media
Mass Comm 19 Newswriting for the
Broadcast Media
Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting
Mass Comm 27 Scriptwnting for Radio
and Television
A Research Course (Choice of one. Certain
of these courses are required in specific
sequences.)
Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling
Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology
Psy 32 Sensory Experimental Psychology
Psy 24 Social Psychology
Bus 45 Marketing Research
An applied Media Experience Course
(Choice of one.)
Mass Comm 48-49 Practicum
Mass Comm 70-79 Internship
Mass Comm 80-89 Independent Study
NOTE: Mass Communication core courses
may be utilized both to meet the core require-
ments and to complete sequence require-
ments. Since some core courses must be used
to meet sequence requirements students
should review carefully sequence require-
ments in selecting courses.
SEQUENCE REQUIREMENTS
Mass Communication majors must complete
at least one sequence. All sequence require-
ments are in addition to the core curriculum
but the same course may be used to meet the
core requirements as well as the requirements
of sequences.
Advertising Sequence:
Bus 28-29 Marketing Management
Bus 32 Advertising
Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling or
Bus 45 Marketing Research or
Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology
GCO 5 1 1 Layout and Design
GCO 512 Typographic Composition
Mass Comm 1 1 Oral Communication
Art 27 Photography I or
Art 15 Two-dimensional Design
Bus 47 Creative Advertising is
strongly recommended, though
not required, for this sequence.
Broadcasting Sequence:
Mass Comm 19
Pol Sci 34
Mass Comm 1 1
Newswriting for
Broadcast Media
Political Newswriting
Oral Communication
43
Mass Comm 31 Mass Media Law and
Regulation
Mass Comm 28 Radio Programming
and Production
Mass Comm 24 Television Production
Mass Comm 27 Sciiptwriting for Radio
and Television
Eng 26 Film and Literature or
Thea 1 1 Introduction to Film
Journalism Sequence:
Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences
Eng 17 Critical Wnting
Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media
Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting
Pol Sci 1 1 State and Local Government
Soc 34 Racial and Cultural Minorities
Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling
Art 27 Photography I
GCO 512 Typographic Composition
Public Relations Sequence:
Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences
Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media
Eng 37 Public Relations and Publicity
Bus 28-29 Marketing Management
Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling or
Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology
An 27 Photography I
Mass Comm 24 Television Production
Mass Comm 1 1 Oral Communication
10 INTRODUCTION TO
MASS COMMUNICATION
Theories of the process of mass communica-
tion and introduction to the mass media;
attention will be given to problems of censor-
ship and media ethics. Analysis of the mass
media's impact on society; emphasis will be
placed on the social, psychological, and
political implications of the media's shaping
mfluence on man and institutions.
1 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF
ORAL COMMUNICATION
The dynamics of oral communication. The
development of elementary principles of
simple oral communication through lectures,
prepared assignments in speaking, and infor-
mal class exercises. Utilizes video-tape sequ-
ences for feedback to students.
19 NEWSWRITING FOR
THE BROADCAST MEDIA
Analysis of and practice in newswriting for
broadcast: the news story, the newscast, and
the interview. Frequent workshop sessions for
critiques of student writing and oral presenta-
tions. Alternate years.
24 TELEVISION PRODUCTION
Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and
business aspects of video programs. Study and
use of basic equipment to produce standard
formats on videotape
27 SCRIPTWRITING FOR
RADIO AND TELEVISION
Analysis of differences between radio and
television writing requirements, station for-
mats, standard program forms, script stan-
dards, writing and criticism. Alternate years.
28 RADIO PROGRAMMING
AND PRODUCTION
Contemporary broadcast programming tech-
niques including station scheduling, program
development and analysis, and implementa-
tion in real and hypothetical situations.
Emphasis on management functions. Alter-
nate years.
30 THEORIES AND ISSUES IN
MASS COMMUNICATION
An analysis of current theories dealing with
mass communication systems and the beha-
vior and attitudes of, and effects on, their
audiences. The course also examines contem-
porary mass media issues with an emphasis on
developing critical thinking skills. Prere-
quisite: Mass Comm 10.
31 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION
An examination of the legal structure and the
system by which mass communication is con-
trolled in this society. The forces which shape,
influence, and make policy will be consid-
ered. Cross-listed as Political Science 36.
Prerequisite: junior or senior standing or
consent of instructor.
48-49 PRACTICUM IN
MASS COMMUNICATION
Utilization of mass communication princi-
ples, techniques, and skills in an applied set-
ting through work experience in a communi-
cation agency or organization. This
experience is coordinated with regular class
meetings to analyze and evaluate relationships
between theory and practice. Prerequisite:
upper division status and consent of instruc-
tor.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns usually work off campus in a field
related to their communication sequence;
some may work with the campus radio station.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Studies involve research related to the com-
munication sequence of the student.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
Graphic Arts
Through special arrangements, the
following courses offered at the Wil-
liamsport Area Community College are
available only to students in the Mass
Communication major and in the Art
Track III major in Commercial Design.
The WACC courses are taken as part of
the student's schedule and are listed with
Lycoming offerings during registration
periods.
5 1 1 LAYOUT AND DESIGN
Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques
used in preparation of copy for reproduction;
paste-up and color separation overlays. 4 cr.
5 1 2 TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION
Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and
practice in the care and use of composing
machines, both hot (mechanical) and cold
(photo). 4 cr.
521 PROCESS CAMERA
Concepts and techniques of darkroom proce-
dure for reproduction of line and halftone copy
on process camera. 4 cr.
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
Associate Professors: Getchell, Haley
(Chairperson)
Assistant Professors: Bucki, DeSilva,
Sprechini, Wallace
Part-time Instructor: Dotzel
The Department of Mathematical Sci-
ences offers major programs in computer
science and mathematics.
Computer Science
A major in computer science consists
of 1 1 courses: Mathematics 16, 18, and
19, and Computer Science 15, 26, 27,
44, 45, and three other computer science
courses numbered 30 or above, one of
which must be 31 or 37. Recommended
extradepartmental courses: Physics 27,
Philosophy 25, and Psychology 37.
A minor in Computer Science consists
of Computer Science 26, 27, and two
other computer science courses num-
bered 20 or above.
15 INTRODUCTION TO
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Introduction to programming and software
utilities. Topics include algorithms, program
44
structure, computer configuration, memory
allocation, and an exposure to application
packages. Laboratory experience is included,
most recently using OMSI Pascal, the Mini-
Calc spreadsheet, and RUNOFF, a text for-
matting package. Prerequisite: credit for or
exemption from Mathematics 5.
26 PRINCIPLES OF
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING
Principles of effective programming, includ-
ing structured programming, stepwise refine-
ment, assertion proving, style, debugging,
control structure, decision tables, finite state
machines, recursion, and encoding. Utilities
most recently used include SVS Pascal, the
UNIX operating systems. C. and Shell pro-
gramming. Prerequisite: a grade ofC or bet-
ter in Computer Science 15 or consent of
instructor.
27 DATA STRUCTURES
Representation of data and algorithms asso-
ciated with data structures. Topics include
representation of lists, trees, graphs and
strings, algorithms for searching and sorting.
Prerequisite: a grade of C or better in Com-
puter Science 26 or consent of instructor.
Corequisite: Mathematics 16.
.M INTRODUCTION TO
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS
Study and analysis of tabulated data leading to
interpolation, numerical integration, numeri-
cal solutions of differential equations, and
systems of equations. Prerequisite: Computer
Science 15 and Mathematics 19. Alternate
years. Cross-listed as Mathematics 31 .
35 INTRODUCTION TO
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
An introduction to graphics hardware and
software with emphasis on the mathematics
necessary to represent, transform, and display
images of two and three dimensional objects.
Laboratory exercises will be designed to
explore the capabilities of the graphics system
and to test the students' understanding of the
principles discussed in class. Prerequisite:
Computer Science 26 and either Computer
Science 27 or permission of the instructor.
Alternate years.
37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX ALGEBRA
An introduction to some of the algorithms
which have been developed for producing
numerical solutions to such linear algebraic
problems as solving systems of linear equa-
tions, inverting matrices, computing the
eigenvalues of a matrix . and solving the linear
least-squares problem. Prerequisites: Com-
puter Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or con-
sent of instructor. Alternate years. Cross-
listed as Mathematics 37.
39 DATABASE SYSTEMS
External storage structures, hashed files,
indexed files; relational, network, and hierar-
chical data models; relational algebra and the
relational calculus; design theory for relation-
al databases; query optimization; concurrent
operations; database protection. Prerequisite:
Computer Science 27. Alternate years.
44 MACHINE LANGUAGE
Principles of machine language programming;
computer organization and representation of
numbers, strings, arrays, and list structures at
the machine level; interrupt programming,
relocatable code, linking loaders; interfacing
with operating systems. Prerequisite: a grade
of C or better in Computer Science 26 or
consent of instructor.
45 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING
The emphasis in this course is on the algor-
ithms used in programming the various parts
of a computer system. These parts include
assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt proces-
sors, input/output schedulers, processor and
job schedulers, and memory managers. Pre-
requisite: Computer Science 27 and 44.
46 COMPILER CONSTRUCTION
The emphasis in this course is on the con-
struction of translators for programming lan-
guages. Topics include lexical analysis, block
structure, grammars, parsing, program rep-
resentation, and run-time organization. Pre-
requisite: Computer Science 27. Alternate
years.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
Mathematics
A major in mathematics consists of 10
units of courses in the mathematical sci-
ences: Computer Science 15, Mathema-
tics 18. 19, 20, 24, 34, 42, and three
other mathematics courses numbered
above 20, one of which may be replaced
by Mathematics 12, 14, or 16. Students
seeking secondary certification in mathe-
matics are required to complete Mathe-
matics 30 and 36 and are advised to
enroll in Philosophy 17. In addition, all
majors are advised to elect Philosophy 25
and 33, Physics 25 and 26.
In addition to the regular courses listed
below, special courses are occasionally
available. Recent topics include compu-
ter graphics and discrete probability.
A minor in Mathematics consists of
Mathematics 20, 24, and two other
mathematics courses numbered above
20.
5 INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA
A self-paced study of arithmetic and decimal
numerals, fractions, the real number line,
factoring, solutions to linear and quadratic
equations, graphs of linear and quadratic
functions, expressions with rational expo-
nents, algebraic functions, exponential func-
tions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE IS
LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS
DEPARTMENT. One-half unit of credit.
7 MATHEMATICS IN
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
This course is intended for prospective
elementary school teachers and is required of
all those seeking elementary certification.
Topics include systems of numbers and of
numeration, computational algorithms, envir-
onmental and transformation geometry mea-
surement, and mathematical concept forma-
tion. Observation and participation in Greater
Williamsport elementary schools. Corequis-
ite: any education course numbered 40 or
above which is specifically required for
elementary certification or consent of
instructor.
9 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS
An intuitive approach to the calculus concepts
with applications to business, biology, and
social-science problems. Not open to students
who have completed Mathematics 18. Prere-
quisite: credit for or exemption from Mathe-
matics 5. Alternate years.
12 FINITE MATHEMATICS
FOR DECISION MAKING
An introduction to some of the principal
mathematical models, not involving calculus,
which are used in business administration,
social sciences, and operations research. The
course will include both deterministic models
such as graphs, networks, linear programming
and voting models, and probabilistic models
such as Markov chains and games. Prerequis-
ite: credit for or exemption from Mathematics
5.
13 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS
Empirical distributions of measurements,
probability and random variables, discrete and
continuous probability distributions, statisti-
cal inference from small samples, linear
regression and correlation, analysis of
45
enumerative data. Prerequisite: credit for or
exemption from Mathematics 5.
14 MULTIVARIATE STATISTICS
The study of statistical techniques used in
experimental designs where more than one
random variable is involved. Techniques
include analysis of variance, analysis of
covariance. multiple regression and correla-
tion, factor anaylsis and canonical correla-
tions, contingency tables, discriminative anal-
ysis, and non-parametric techniques. Further
topics will be chosen from cluster analysis,
time series analysis, and repealed measure
analysis. Extensive use of a statistical package
is made (currently BMDP). Prerequisite:
Mathematics 13 or its equivalent. Alternate
years.
16 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS
An introduction to discrete structures. Topics
include equivalence relations, partitions and
quotient sets, mathematical induction, recur-
sive functions, elementary logic, discrete
number systems, elementary combinatorial
theory, and general algebraic structures
emphasizing semi-groups, groups, lattices.
Boolean algebras, graphs and trees. Prere-
quisite: Computer Science 15 or consent of
instructor.
17 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS
The study of logarithmic, exponential, trigo-
nometric, polynomial, and rational functions,
their graphs, and elementary properties. Pre-
requisite: credit for or cxemptionfrom Mathe-
matics 5.
18. CALCULUS WITH
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY I
Differentiation of algebraic functions, graph-
ing plane curves, applications to related rate
and extremal problems, integration of alge-
braic functions, areas of plane regions, vol-
umes of solids or revolution, and other appli-
cations. Prerequisite: a grade ofC or better in
Mathematics 17 or consent of instructor.
19 CALCULUS WITH
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY II
Differentiation and integration of transcen-
dental functions, parametric equations, polar
coordinates, the conic sections and their appli-
cations, infinite sequences, and series expan-
sions. Prereauisile: a grade ofC or better in
Mathematics IS or consent of instructor.
20 MULTIVARIATE CALCULUS
WITH MATRIX ALGEBRA
Vectors, linear transformations and their mat-
rix representations, determinants, matrix
inversion, solutions to systems of linear equa-
tions, differentiation and integration of multi-
variate functions, vector field theory and
applications. Prerequisite: a grade of C or
belter in Mathematics J 9 or consent of
instructor.
21 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
A study of ordinary differential equations and
their applications: first-order linear differen-
tial equations, the Picard Existence Theorem,
solution by separation of variables, solution
by numerical methods; second-order linear
differential equations, solution by variation of
parameters, solution by power series, solution
by Laplace transforms; systems of first-order
equation, solutions by eigenvalues; qualita-
tive theory, stability theory asymptotic beha-
vior, and the Poincare-Bendixon theorem.
Besides the usual applications in physics and
engineering, considerable attention will be
given to modem applications in the social and
life sciences. Prerequisite: a grade of C or
better in Mathematics 19 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
23 COMPLEX VARIABLES
Complex numbers, analytic functions, com-
plex integration. Cauchy's theorems and their
applications. Corequisile: Mathematics 20.
Alternate years.
24 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS
Topics regularly included are the nature of
mathematical systems, essentials of logical
reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set
theory. Other topics frequently included are
approaches to the concepts of infinity and
continuity, and the construction of the real
number system. The course serves as a bridge
from the elementary calculus to advanced
courses in algebra and analysis. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 19 or consent of instructor.
30 TOPICS IN GEOMETRY
An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean geomet-
ry, and an introduction to related geometries.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 18. Alternate
31 INTRODUCTION TO
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS
Study and analysis of tabulated data leading to
interpolation, numerical integration, numen-
cal solutions of differential equations, and
systems of equations. Prerequisite: Computer
Science 15 and Mathematics 19. Alternate
years. Cross-listed as Computer Science 31 .
32-33 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS III
A study of probability, discrete and continu-
ous random variables, expected values and
moments, sampling, point estimation, sam-
pling distributions, interval estimation, test of
hypotheses, regression and linear hypotheses,
experimental design models. Corequisite:
Mathematics 20. Alternate years.
34 MODERN ALGEBRA
An integrated approach to groups, rings.
fields, and vector spaces and functions which
preserve their structure. Prerequisite: Mathe-
matics 24.
36 CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION
A course designed for mathematics majors
who are planning to teach at the secondary
level. Emphasis will be placed on the mathe-
matics that form the foundation of secondary
mathematics. Ideas will be presented to
familiarize the student with various curricu-
lum proposals, to provide for innovation
within the existing curriculum, and to expand
the boundaries of the existing curriculum.
Open only to junior and senior mathematics
majors enrolled in the secondary-education
program. Alternate years.
37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX ALGEBRA
An introduction to some of the algorithms
which have been developed for producing
numerical solutions to such linear algebraic
problems as solving systems of linear equa-
tions, inverting matrices, computing the
eigenvalues of a matrix, and solving the linear
least-squares problem. Prerequisites: Com-
puter Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or con-
sent of instructor. Alternate years. Cross-
listed as Computer Science 37.
38 OPERATIONS RESEARCH
Queuing theory, including simulation tech-
niques; optimization theory, including linear
programming, integer programming, and
dynamic programming; game theory, includ-
ing two-person zero-sum games, cooperative
games, and multiperson games. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 12 or Mathematics 20. Alternate
42 REAL ANALYSIS
A rigorous analysis of the basic concepts of
real variable calculus; the real number system
as a complete, ordered field; the topology of
Euclidean space, compact sets, the Heine-
Borel Theorem; continuity; the Intermediate
Value Theorem; derivatives, the Mean Value
Theorem; Reimann integrals, the Fundamen-
tal Theorem of Calculus; infinite series, and
Taylor's theorem. Prerequisite: Mathematics
24.
48 SEMINAR
Topics in modem mathematics of current
interest to the instructor. A different topic is
selected each semester. This semester is
designed to provide junior and senior mathe-
matics majors and other qualified students
with more than the usual opportunity for con-
centrated and cooperative inquiry. Prerequis-
ite: consent of instructor. One-half unit of
credit. This course may be repealedfor credit.
10-19 INTERNSHIP (See index)
46
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
MUSIC
Assistant Professors: Boerckel
(Chairperson). Jeffers, Thayer
Part-time Instructors: Freed,
Gallup, Guth, Lakey,
Nacinovich, Payn, Russell
The music major is required to take a
balanced program of theory, applied
music, music history, and music ensem-
ble. A minimum of eight courses (exclu-
sive of all ensemble and applied music
courses except Music 46) is required,
and these must include Music 10, 1 1 , 20,
21 , 35 and 36. Each major must partici-
pate in an ensemble (Music 67, 68 and/or
69) and take one hour of applied music
per week for a minimum of four semes-
ters. (See Music 60-66). The major must
include at least one-half hour of piano in
the applied program Unless a piano profi-
ciency test is requested and passed. Any-
one declaring music as a second major
must do so by the beginning of the junior
year.
The Music Department recommends
that non-majors select courses from the
following list to meet distribution
requirements: Music 16, 17; Music 18,
1 9; Music 1 3 or Music 24 in combination
with 16, 17, 18 or 19.
Student recitals offer opportunities to
gain experience in public performance.
Music majors and other students quali-
fied in performance may present formal
recitals.
10-11 MUSIC THEORY I AND II
A two-semester course open to all students.
An examination of the fundamental compo-
nents and theoretical concepts of music. The
student will develop musicianship through
application of applied skills. iMusic 10 is
prerequisite to Music II).
13 MUSIC OF TODAY
Non-technical survey of styles, techniques
and contents of music produced since 1930.
with emphasis on developments in electronic
music. Leading figures of major contempor-
ary movements in music, literature and the
visual arts and their works will be presented
and discussed in relation to musical culture.
The course will include some practical expo-
sure to the electronic music studio and record-
ing techniques.
16 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC
A basic course in the materials and techniques
of music. Examples drawn from vanous per-
iods and styles are designed to enhance per-
ception and appreciation through careful and
informed listening.
17 SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC
A chronological survey of music in Western
civilization from Middle Ages to the present.
Composers and musical styles are considered
in the context of the broader culture of each
major era.
18 AMERICAN MUSIC I
For the major or non-major interested in
studying all types of American music, from
pre-Revolutionary days through Worid War 1.
Areas explored will include Indian. African,
and European roots influencing the serious
music for small and large ensembles, the
development of show music from minstrels to
Broadway musicals, the evolution of "Tin
Pan Alley," and the beginnings of jazz. Aller-
19 AMERICAN MUSIC II
For the major or non-major interested in
studying all types of American music. Ameri-
can Music II will cover post-world War I days
to the present. Areas explored will include
indigenous serious music for small and large
ensembles, the mature Broadway musical, the
evolution of jazz, the development of rock,
and the fusion of musical styles in the 1970's.
Alternate years.
20-21 MUSIC THEORY III AND IV
A continuation of the integrated theory course
moving toward newer uses of music malenals.
Prerequisite: Music II. Alternate years.
24 ELECTRONIC MUSIC I
Technical introduction to synthesizer studio
techniques. Topics will include musical
acoustics, basic recording, sound generation
and modification devices and the analysis of
relevant examples in popular and avant-garde
styles. Students will produce synthesized tape
projects dunng assigned studio hours. Alter-
nate years.
25 ELECTRONIC MUSIC II
Further consideration of recording tech-
niques. Use of microphones, multi-track
recording, mixing, special effects devices and
synchronization will be introduced. Students
will take part in live recording of concerts and
rehearsals of a variety of ensembles. Student
projects will include complete recording ses-
sions and the production of electronic music
compositions utilizing classical studio tech-
niques and real-time networks. Prerequisite:
Music 24 or consent of instructor. Alternate
years.
30 COMPOSITION I
Creative writing in smaller vocal and instru-
mental forms. Students identify and use the
techniques employed by major composers of
the 20th century. Prerequisite: Music II or
consent of instructor.
31 CONDUCTING
A study of the fundamentals of conducting
with frequent opportunity for practical experi-
ence. The College music organizations serve
to make performance experience possible.
Prerequisite: Music 10-11 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
35 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC I
The development of musical styles and forms
from Gregorian chant through Mozart,
including composers from the medieval.
Renaissance, baroque and early classical eras.
Prerequisite: Music 10. 16. or 17 or consent
of instructor.
36 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC II
The development of musical styles and forms
from Beethoven to the present, including
composers from the late classical, romantic
and modem eras. Prerequisite: Music 35 or
consent of instructor.
39 ORCHESTRATION
A study of modem orchestral instruments and
examination of their use by the great masters
with practical problems in instrumentation.
The College music organizations serve to
make performance experience possible. Pre-
requisite: Music 10-11 or consent of instruc-
tor. Alternate years.
40 COMPOSITION II
Creative writing in larger vocal and instru-
mental forms. Students write more extended
works in order to develop an individual style
of composition. Prerequsite: Music 30 or
consent of instructor.
42 PROJECTS IN ELECTRONIC MUSIC
Digital techniques of Electronic Music pro-
duction. Notation systems for electronic mus-
ic. Aesthetics of electronic music. Students
will use the full resources of the studio to
complete original compositions and will
study, prepare and present works by major
composers of electronic music. Prerequisite:
Music 25 or consent of instructor.
47
45 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MUSIC
The intensive study of a selected area of music
literature, designed to develop research tech-
niques in music. The topic is announced at the
Spring pre-registration. Sample topics
include: Beethoven. Impressionism, Vienna
1900-1914. Prerequisite. Music 16. 17 or 21
or consent of instructor.
46 RECITAL
The preparation and presentation of a full-
lenglh public recital, normally during the stu-
dent's senior year. Prerequisite: approval hy
the department.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
Applied Music and Ensemble
The study of petformance in piano,
voice, organ, strings, woodwinds, and
percussion is designed to develop sound
technique and a knowledge of the appro-
priate literature for the instrument. Stu-
dent recitals offer opportunities to gain
experience in public performance.
Credit for applied music courses (pri-
vate lessons) and ensemble (choir,
orchestra and band) is earned on a frac-
tional basis. For a description of this, see
page 6. An applied course or ensemble
should NOT be substituted for an
academic course, but should in every
case be in addition to the normal four
academic courses.
Extra fees apply for private lessons
(Music 60-66) as follows:
$110 per semester for a half-hour lesson
per week. $220 per semester for an hour
lesson per week. Private lessons are
given for 13 weeks.
60 Piano, 6 1 Voice , 62 Strings or Guitar,
63 Organ, 64 Brass, 65 Woodwinds, 66
Percussion.
67 ORCHESTRAL ENSEMBLE
The Williamsport Symphony Orchestra
allows students with significant instrumental
expenence to become members of this region-
al ensemble Participation in the W.S.O. is
contingent upon audition and the availability
of openings. Students are allowed a maximum
of one hour of Ensemble credit per semester.
A student who is enrolled in orchestra onlv
should register for Music 67B (one hour cred-
it). A student may belong to two ensembles,
choosing either Choir or Wind Ensemble as
the second group. Such a student will then
register for Music 67A ('/; hour credit) plus
either Music 68A ('/: hour credit) or Music
69A (V2 hour credit).
68 CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR)
Participation in the College choir is designed
to enable any student possessing at least aver-
age talent an opportunity to study choral tech-
nique. Emphasis is placed upon acquaintance
with choral literature, tone production, dic-
tion, and phrasing. Students are allowed a
maximum of one hour of Ensemble credit per
semester. A student who is enrolled in Choir
only should register for Music 68B (one hour
credit). A student may belong to two ensem-
bles, choosing either Orchestra or Wind
Ensemble as the second group. Such a student
will then register for Music 68A iVz hour
credit) plus either Music 67A ('/: hour credit)
or Music 69A {'A hour credit).
69 WIND ENSEMBLE (BAND)
The College Wind Ensemble allows students
with some instrumental experience to become
acquainted with good band literature and
develop personal musicianship through parti-
cipation in group instrumental activity. Stu-
dents are allowed a maximum of one hour of
Ensemble credit per semester. A student who
is enrolled in Band only should register for
Music 69B (one hour credit). A student may
belong to two ensembles, choosing either
Orchestra or Choir as the second group. Such
a student will then register for Music 69A ( '/:
hour credit) plus either Music 67A ('/; hour
credit) or Music 68A ('/;; hour credit).
NEAR EAST CULTURE
AND ARCHAEOLOGY
Professor: Guerra (Coordinator)
The Near East culture and archaeology
interdisciplinary major is designed to
acquaint students with the "cradle of
Western civilization," both in its ancient
and modem aspects. Majors will com-
plete a minimum of eight to 10 courses
related to the Near East.
Required courses are described in their
departmental sections and include:
1. Four courses (semesters) in lan-
guage and culture from:
History and Culture of the Ancient
Near East (Religion 28)
History of Art (Art 22)
Ancient History (History 20)
Old Testament Faith and History
(Religion 13)
Judaism and Islam (Religion 24)
Two semesters of foreign language
(Hebrew 1, 2 or Greek 1, 2)
2. Two courses (semesters) in archaeol-
ogy from:
Biblical Archaeology (Religion 26)
Special Archaeology courses, such as
independent studies or in May or
summer terms in the Near East.
3. Two courses (semesters) in the
cooperating departments (art, his-
tory, political science, religion and
sociology-anthropology) or related
departments. These two courses, usu-
ally taken in the junior or senior
years, can be independent study.
Topics should be related either to the
ancient or the modem Near East and
must be approved in advance by the
committee supervising the interdis-
ciplinary program. The study of mod-
em Arabic or Hebrew is encouraged.
Other courses may be suggested by the
supervisory committee within the limits
of a 10-course major. The number of
courses taken within this program appli-
cable toward fulfilling the College distri-
bution requirements will vary according
to the selection of courses.
NURSING
Professor: Rodgers, (Chairperson)
Assistant Professors: Jacoby,
Parrish, Boroch
Instructors: Atkinson
Pagana (on leave)
Students wishing to major in nursing
will be admitted to the College under the
usual admission procedures. Freshmen
should follow the nursing curriculum
plan for the freshman year in the sequ-
ence designated. To be considered for
continuation in nursing, a minimum
G.P.A. of 2.5 is required at completion
of the freshman year. A supplementary
48
application should be submitted to the
Department of Nursing by January 15 of
the freshman year.
Clinical Learning Resources
In addition to the College's new well-
equipped Nursing Skills Lab. opportun-
ity for self-learning is provided in the
adjacent Learning Center which is
equipped with electronic study carrels
and audio-visual materials.
A wide variety of health-care agencies
in the surrounding area are utilized for
clinical experiences. Cooperating hos-
pitals and agencies include: Divine
Providence Hospital, Williamsport Hos-
pital, Evangelical Hospital, Geisinger
Medical Center, Leader Nursing Home
and Rehabilitation Center, Danville
State Hospital, Pennsylvania Depart-
ment of Health. Regional Home Health
Services and the County Health
Improvement Plan (CHIP).
Expenses of the Nursing Program
Students are responsible for their own
transportation to assigned clinical areas.
The student of nursing assumes all finan-
cial obligations listed in the section on
fees in this bulletin including a $40 lab
fee for each of the clinical nursing
courses (Nursing 21, 30, 31, 32,33,36,
40 and 41 ). Additional expenses include
uniforms, name pin, watch with second
hand, bandage scissors, stethoscope,
blood pressure cuff, malpractice insur-
ance, annual health examinations, and
standardized achievement tests.
Major in Nursing
The major in nursing consists of:
Nursing 20, 21, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35,
36, 40"; 41, 42, and 43 or 80-89. In
addition, the following are prerequisites
for specific nursing courses: Chemistry
8, 15; Biology O^-M, 26; Psychology
10, 17; Mathematics 13, and Computer
Science 15. The religion/philosophy
distribution requirement is met by the
required courses: Philosophy 19 and
Religion 20. The history/social science
distribution requirement is met by the
required courses: Psychology 10 and 17.
In addition, the student is required to take
one course from amona Socioloav/
Anthropology 10, 14, 20, 28, or 29. The
fine arts/foreign language distribution
requirement can be met by two courses in
one department from among art, litera-
ture, music, or theatre; or by two courses
in foreign language on the intennediate
or higher course level.
Unless otherwise indicated, nursing
courses are open only to nursing majors.
Policies Specific to Nursing
In addition to the Lycoming College
continuance policies, the following poli-
cies are specific to all declared majors in
the Department of Nursing:
1 . A grade of C or better is required in
all clinical nursing courses to con-
tinue in the nursing program. These
courses are Nursing 21, 30, 31, 32,
33 , 36, 40 and 4 1 . Students who earn
a grade of less than 70 percent or C in
either the theoretical or clinical com-
ponent of a nursing course will
receive a course grade of F and will be
required to repeat both components of
the course. Students who receive a
nursing grade of F will not be permit-
ted to continue in the nursing sequ-
ence until the deficiency has been
made up.
2. Policies regarding absence from clas-
ses or from the clinical portion of
nursing courses are determined by the
instructor(s) responsible for the
course. No absence from the clinical
portion of the course will be excused
except for illness or a family
emergency. Excessive absences for
any reason will necessitate repeating
the entire course.
Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N.
FRESHMAN YEAR
Fall
Chem. 8* (Inorganic Chemistry).. 1
Eng. 6 (Composition) 1
Psych. 10* (Intro to Psych.) 1
Fine Arts/Lang 1
Physical Education 0
4
Spring
Chem. 15* (Brief Organic
Chemistry) 1
Eng. Elective 1
Psych. 17* (Developmental
Psych.) 1
Fine Arts/Lang 1
Physical Education 0
4
SOPHOMORE YEAR
Fall
Bio. 13 (Anatomy and
Physiology) 1
Math. 15 (Intro to Statistics) 1
Nur. 20 (Concepts of Nutrition
in Family Health) 75
Rel. 20 (Death and Dying) I
3.75
Spring
Bio. 14 (Anatomy and
Physiology) 1
Math 13 (Intro, to
Computer Sci. ) 1
Bio. 26 (Microbiology for
Health Sciences) 1
Nur. 21 (Foundations of
Professional Practice) 1.25
4.25
JUNIOR YEAR
Fall
Nur.
Nur.
Nur.
30 (Nursing Care of the
Developing Family I) 1.5
32 (Nursing Care of the
Adult i) 1.5
34 (Basic Concepts of
Pharmacology and
Therapeutics) 1
Spring
Nur. 31 (Nursing Care of the
Developing Family II).
Nur. 33 (Nursing Care of
the Adult II)
Nur. 35 (Research in Nursing) .
1.5
1.5
1
49
May Term
Nur. 36 (The Nurse in the
Social System) ....
SENIOR YEAR
Fall
Nur. 40 (Nursing Care of the
Emotionally Troubled
Individual and Family) ... 1.5
Elective 1
Guided Elective** 1
Nur. 43 (Topics in Nursing) 5
4
Spring
Nur. 41 (Comprehensive
Nursing Care) 1.5
Nur. 42 (Professional
Issues) 5
Phil. 19 (Ethical Issues in
Biology and Medicine) ... 1
♦Prerequisite to Sophomore year.
**Student must select one course from
Sociology/Anthropology which may be
taken at any point in the program.
Recommended courses at this time are
Soc. 10. soc. 20, Soc. 28, Anth. 14 and
Anth. 29.
Requirement for Graduation: 32 Units
(128 Credits).
The student may take additional units
for electives, independent study
and/or honors.
20 CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION
IN FAMILY HEALTH
Essentials ol normal nutrition and their rela-
tionship to the health of individuals and fami-
lies. These concepts serve as a basis for the
development of an understanding of thera-
peutic application of dietary principles and the
health professional's role and responsibility in
this facet of client care. Three hours of lec-
ture, '/j unit. Prerequisites: Chemistry S, 15.
or consent of instructor. Open to non-nursing
majors.
21 FOUNDATIONS OF
PROFESSIONAL NURSING PRACTICE
Introduction of major theoretical elements
underlying professional nursing practice.
Focus on the concept of health and common
health problems recognizing the multi-
directional intluence of the individual, family,
and environment. In this first clinical course
the student will utilize the nursing process in
assisting clients to attain a maximum level of
functioning. Three hours of lecture and five
hours clinical laboratory. I 'A units. Prere-
quisites: Chemistry 8, 15, Nursing 20. and
Biology 13.
30-3 1 NURSING CARE OF THE
DEVELOPING FAMILY
Examination of health and nursing needs of
beginning and developing families. Emphasis
on nursing needs of mothers and infants within
the family unit as well as the common health
problems of children through adolescence.
Three hours of lecture and Th hours clinical
laboratory. J'/: units. Prerequisite for Nurs-
ing JO: Nursing 21 , Biology 14 and 26. Prere-
quisite for Nursing 31: Nursing 30 and 34.
32-33 NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT
Identification of adult health care needs and
implementation of nursing activities based on
an understanding of growth and development,
pathophysiology, communication skills,
interpersonal dynamics, and psychosocial
interventions. Three hours of lecture and Th
hours clinical laboratory /'/:■ units. Prere-
quisiteforNursing32: Nursing21 . Biology 14
and 26. Prerequisite for Nursing 33: Nursing
32 and 34.
34 BASIC CONCEPTS OF
PHARMACOLOGY AND
THERAPEUTICS
Fundamentals of pharmacology and thera-
peutics are presented for the various classes of
drugs. Relationships of pharmacological
mechanisms to the affected biochemical and
physiological processes. Interactions and
toxicologica aspects of drug therapy are
reviewed. Four hours of lecture. I unit. Co-
requisite: Nursing 30, 32. or consent of
instructor. Open to non-nursing majors.
35 RESEARCH IN NURSING
Expansion of theoretical basis of research
methodology with emphasis on analyzing,
criticizing, and interpreting nursing research.
Development of a research proposal focusing
on a nursing problem. Fmir hours of lecture. I
unit. Prerequisite: Mathematics 13. Compu-
ter Science 15. and Nursing 30 and 32 or
consent of instructor. Open to non-majors.
36 THE NURSE IN THE SOCIAL SYSTEM
Seminar discussions and clinical laboratory
using (he hospital as a prototype. Theories of
social systems. Examination of induction into
the hospital system Evaluation of standards
of care. Focus on utilization of change theory.
Twelve hours of lecture and 96 hours of clini-
cal laboratory. I unit Prerequisites: Nursing
31. 33. 34 and 35. Required for the nursing
major and offered only in May term
40 NURSING CARE OF THE
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY
Examination of disturbed human relationships
with focus on intrapsychic, interpersonal, and
physiologic etiology. Emphasis on advanced
therapeutic nurse-patient relationships within
context of family . community . and health care
systems. Three hours of lecture and 7'/- hours
clinical laboratory, /'/r units. Prerequisites:
Nursing 31. 33. 36.
41 COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE
Culminating nursing course with focus on
utilizing nursing theory in a choice of clinical
settings. Seminars will provide opportunities
for students to share commonalities and
unique aspects of professional practice. Three
hours of lecture and 7'/; hours of clinical
laboratory I'/: units. Prerequisites: Nursmg
36. 40.
42 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES
An analysis of nursing issues in the context of
the historical background of the profession,
the social forces which influence nursing, and
nursing's impact upon society. Two-hour
seminar. '/: unit. Prerequisite: Senior stand-
ing.
43 TOPICS IN NURSING
Selected topic courses in nursing designed to
permit students to pursue subjects which,
because of their specialized nature, may not be
offered on a regular basis, '/r unit. Prerequis-
ite: Senior standing.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
IN NURSING
An opportunity to develop and implement an
individual plan of study under faculty guid-
ance. '/." unit. Prerequisite: Senior standing or
consent of chairperson.
PHILOSOPHY
Associate Professor: Griffith
(Chairperson). Whelan
Assistant Professor: Herring
The study of philosophy develops a
critical understanding of the basic con-
cepts and presuppositions around which
we organize our thought in science,
religion, education, morality, the arts,
and other human enterprises. A major in
philosophy, together with appropriate
other courses, can provide an excellent
preparation for policy-making positions
of many kinds, for graduate study in
several fields, and for careers in educa-
50
tion. law. and the ministry. The major in
philosophy consists of eight courses
numbered 10 or above, including 38. 39,
49 and at least three other courses num-
bered 25 or above.
A minor in Philosophy consists of any
four philosophy courses numbered 20 or
above. Three more specialized minors
are also available. A minor in Philosophy
and Law consists of four courses from
Philosophy 21, 22, 25, 34. 35. 49 or
Studies; a minor in Philosophy and Sci-
ence requires completion of four courses
from Philosophy 21. 22, 25, 33, 49 or
Studies; a minor in the History of Philo-
sophy may be completed by selecting
four courses from Philosophy 21 , 22, 38,
39. 49 or Studies. Any courses selected
from Philosophy 49. 80, 81, 90 and 91
must be approved in advance by the
department, and only one unit may be
used from among 80. 81. 90. and 91 to
complete the requirements of any of
these three minors:
5 PRACTICAL REASONING
A general introduction to topics in logic and
their application to practical reasoning, with
primary emphasis on detecing fallacies, eva-
luating inductive reasoning, and understand-
ing the rudiments of scientific method.
10 INTRODUCTION TO
PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS
An mtroduclory course designed to show the
nature of philosophy by examination of sever-
al examples of problems which have received
extended attention in philosophical literature.
These topics often include the relation of the
mind to the body, the possibility of human
freedom, arguments about the existence of
God. the conditions of knowledge, and the
relation of language to thought. Some atten-
tion is also given to the principles of accept-
able reasoning.
14 PHILOSOPHY AND
PERSONAL CHOICE
An introductory philosophical examination of
a number of contemporary moral issues which
call for personal decision. Topics often inves-
tigated include: the "good" life, obligation to
others, sexual ethics, abortion, suicide and
death . violence and pacifism . obedience to the
law, the relevance of personal beliefs to mor-
ality. Discussion centers on some of the sug-
gestions philosophers have made about how to
make such decisions.
15 PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY
An introductory philosophical examination of
the moral and conceptual dimension of vari-
ous contemporary public issues, such as the
relation of ethics to politics and the law, the
enforcement of morals, the problems of fair
distribution of goods and opportunities, the
legitimacy of restricing the use of natural
resources, and the application of ethics to
business practice. Discussion centers on some
of the suggestions philosophers have made
about how to deal with these issues.
16 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS
An introductory philosophical examination of
a variety of moral problems that arise con-
cerning the American business system.
Included are a systematic consideration of
typical moral problems faced by individuals
and an examination of common moral critic-
isms of the business system itself.
17 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES
IN EDUCATION
An examination of the basic concepts
involved in thought about education, and a
consideration of the various methods for jus-
tifying educational proposals. Typical of the
issues discussed are: Are education and
indoctrination different? What is a liberal edu-
cation? Are education and schooling compati-
ble? What do we need to leam? Alternate
18 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES
IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE
An introductory examination of various philo-
sophical issues and concepts which are of
special importance in legal contexts. Discus-
sion includes both general topics, such as the
justification of punishment, and more specific
topics, such as the insanity defense and the
nghts of the accused. Readings are arranged
topically and include both classical and con-
temporary sources.
19 ETHICAL ISSUES IN
BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE
A philosophical investigation of some of the
ethical issues which arise as a result of con-
temporary medical and biological technology.
Typical of these issues are euthanasia, beha-
vior control, patient rights, experimentation
on humans, fetal research, abortion, genetic
engineering, population control, and distribu-
tion of health resources.
2 1 -22 INTRODUCTION TO THE
HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY
An introductory survey of the history of philo-
sophy from the ancient Greeks through the
early modem period. Particular attention will
be paid to the common origins of philosophy
and science and their subsequent relationship
and to the role which philosophy has played in
the evolution of social and political thought.
Philosophy 21 is not a prerequisite for Philo-
sophy 22.
25 SYMBOLIC LOGIC
A study of modem symbolic logic and its
application to the analysis of arguments.
Included are tmth-functional relations, the
logic of prepositional functions, and deduc-
tive systems. Attention is also given to various
topics in the philosophy of logic.
31 PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE
An examination of a variety of classical and
contemporary philosophical questions about
human nature. Among the questions typically
considered are these: Is there such a thing as
human nature? Are human beings different, in
any fundamental way. from other animals?
Are human beings free? Is human conscious-
ness just a brain process? Are human beings
inherently predisposed to evil? Are human
beings biologically determined to be selfish or
aggressive? Are the differences in achieve-
ment between men and women biologically
based? Prerequisite: Students without previ-
ous study in philosophy must have instructor' s
permission.
32 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION
A philosophical examination of religion.
Included are such topics as the nature of reli-
gious discourse, arguments for and against the
existence of God, and the relation between
religion and science. Readings from classical
and contemporary sources. Prerequisite: stu-
dents without previous study in philosophy
must have instructor's permission. Alternate
33 PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE
A consideration of philosophically important
conceptual problems arising from reflection
about natural science, including such topics as
the nature of scientific laws and theories, the
character of explanation, the import of pre-
diction, the existence of "non-observable"
theoretical entities such as electrons and
genes, the problem of justifying induction,
and various puzzles associated with probabil-
ity. Prerequisite: students without previous
study in philosophy must have instructor's
permission. Alternate years.
34 SOCIAL AND
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY
A systematic philosophical investigation of
the relation between human nature and the
proper social and political order. Topics stud-
ied include the purpose of govemment. the
nature of legitimate authority, the foundation
of human nghts. and the limits of human
freedom. Emphasis is placed on the logic of
social and political thought and on the analysis
of basic principles and concepts. Prerequisite:
students without previous philosophy must
have instructor's permission.
35 ETHICAL THEORY
An inquiry concerning the grounds which
51
distinguish morally right from morally wrong
actions. Central to the course is critical con-
sideration of the proposals and the rationale of
relativists, egoists, utilitarians, and other ethi-
cal theorists. Various topics in metaethics are
also included. Prerequisite: students without
previous study in philosophy must have
instructor's permission.
38 ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY
A critical examination of the ancient Greek
philosophers, with particular emphasis on
Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: two courses
in philosophy or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.
39 EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY
A critical examination of the Continental
Rationalists (Descartes. Spinoza. Leibniz),
the British Empiricists (Locke. Berkeley.
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: fvio courses in
philosophy or consent of instructor. Alternate
years.
49 DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR
An investigation carried on by discussions and
papers, into one philosophical problem, text,
philosopher, or movement. A different topic
is selected each semester. Recent topics
include Sidgwick's ethics, religious language.
Kierkegaard, legal punishment. Wittgenstein,
personal identity and human rights This semi-
nar is designed to provide junior and senior
philosophy majors and other qualified stu-
dents with more than the usual opportunity for
concentrated and cooperative inquiry. Prere-
quisite: consent of instructor. This seminar
may be repeated for credit.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Recent independent studies in philosophy
include Nietzsche, moral education. Rawls"
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia.
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Associate Professor: Burch
Assistant Professor: Whitehill
Instructors: Hair, Holmes
I PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Coeducational physical education classes.
Basic instructions in fundamentals, know-
ledge, and appreciation of sports that include
swimming, tennis, bowling, volleyball,
archery, lield hockey, soccer, golf, badmin-
ton, modem dance, skiing, elementary games
(for elementary teachers), toneastics. physical
fitness, and other activities. Backpacking,
cross-country and alpine skiing, jogging, and
cyling are offered on a contract basis. Begin-
ning swimming is required for all non-
swimmers. Students may select any activity
offered. A reasonable degree of proficiency is
required in the activities. Emphasis is on the
potential use of activities as recreational and
leisure-time interests. Two semesters of
physical education (two hours per week) are
required. All physical education classes are
open to men and women.
Athletic Training
Lycoming College established an
apprenticeship program in athletic train-
ing in 1979 after recognizing two condi-
tions: the importance of the care and
prevention of athletic injuries by trained
professionals, and the career's promising
growth potential.
To complete this non-credit program
students participate in practical as well as
classroom work under the supervision of
Lycoming's certified athletic trainer.
Students become eligible to participate in
the National Athletic Trainers Associa-
tion (N.A.T.A.) Certification examina-
tion to earn the status of an N.A.T.A.
certified trainer.
POLITICAL SCIENCE
Professor: Giglio (Chairperson)
Associate Professor: Roskin
Assistant Professor: Grogan
The major is designed to provide a
systematic understanding of government
and politics at the international, national,
state, and local levels. Majors are
encouraged to develop their faculties to
make independent, objective analyses
which can be applied to the broad spec-
trum of the social sciences.
Although the political science major,
is not designed as a vocational major,
students with such training may go
directly into government service, jour-
nalism, teaching, or private administra-
tive agencies. A political science major
can provide the base for the study of law.
or for graduate studies leading to admin-
strative work in federal, state, or local
governments, international organiza-
tions, or college teaching. Students seek-
ing certification to teach secondary
school social studies may major in politi-
cal science but should consult their
advisers and the education department.
A major consists of eight political .sci-
ence courses, including Political Science
I6B. Prospective majors are encouraged
to register for this course during their
freshman year. An exemption will be
granted only if it strengthens the stu-
dent's program. In addition to 168, stu-
dents must take at least one course in
each of five areas (A to E). Students are
encouraged, also, to select a minor in
another department in accordance with
their academic and career interests and in
consultation with their departmental
advisor.
For non-majors, the department offers
three minors: a minor in Political Science
consists of any four courses numbered 20
or above from areas A to E; a minor in
Foreign Affairs consists of four courses
selected from Political Science 20, 25,
26, 27, 38 and 39; and a minor in Legal
Studies consists of Political Science 31 ,
35, 36 and one other course numbered 20
or above. Students are encouraged to
consult with department members on the
selection of a minor.
16 INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS
AND PUBLIC POLICY
An examination of public policy within the
context of American politics. Includes identi-
fication and analysis of contemporary policy
issues, alternative solutions, factors in for-
mulation, and evaluation of impact. May be
taken for either one-half unit (section 16A) or
full unit (section I6B); declared majors and
prospective majors should take the full-unit
course. I6B.
A. American Politics
10 GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS
IN THE UNITED STATES
An introduction to American national govern-
ment which emphasizes both structural-
functional analysis and policy-making proces-
ses. In addition to the legislative, executive,
and judicial branches of government, atten-
tion will be given to political parties and
interest groups, elections and voting behavior.
52
and constitutional rights. Recommended to all
social science-education majors and to those
students who have had inadequate or msuffi-
cient preparation in American government
1 1 STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT
An examination of the general prmciples.
major problems, and political processes ot the
states and their subdivisions, together with
their role in a federal type of government.
23 AMERICAN PRESIDENCY
A study of the office and powers of the presi-
dent with analysis of his major roles as chief
administrator, legislator, political leader,
foreign policy maker, and commander-in-
chief. Special attention is given to those presi-
dents who led the nation boldly. Subject to
sludenl demand, but offered al least once
during a four-year cycle.
B. Legal Studies
31 CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES
What are our rights and liberties as Ameri-
cans.' What should they be? A frank discus-
sion of the nature and scope of the constitu-
tional guarantees. First Amendment rights,
the rights of criminal suspects and defendants,
racial and sexual equality, and equal protec-
tion of the laws. Students will read and brief
the more important Supreme Court decisions.
Prerequisite: junior or senior standing or
consent of instructor.
35 LAW AND SOCIETY
An examination of the nature, sources, func-
tions, and limits of law as an instrument of
political and social control. Included for dis-
cussion are legal problems pertaining to the
family, crime, deviant behavior, poverty, and
minority groups. Prerequisite: junior or
senior standing or consent of instructor.
36 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION
An examination of the legal structure and the
system by which mass communication is con-
trolled in this society. The forces which shape,
infiuence. and make policy will be consid-
ered. Cross-listed as Mass Communication
31 . Prerequisite: junior or senior standing or
consent of instructor.
C. Applied Politics
33 BUREAUCRACY AND
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
What is bureaucracy? Why and how do
bureaucracies arise? What has been the politi-
cal impact of growth of bureaucracy in gov-
ernment? These questions, among others, will
be considered in this examination of public
bureaucracies. This course is highly recom-
mended to students planning to take an intern-
ship in city or county government through the
political science department. Subject to stu-
dent demand, but offered at least once during
a four-year cycle.
34 POLITICAL NEWSWRITING
A workshop course in the reporting and
rewriting of public affairs at the local, nation-
al, and international levels. There will be
neither texts nor examinations, but short wnt-
ten assignments will be due every class meet-
ing. Prerequisite: English 18 or Mass Comm
19 or consent of instructor . Alternate years.
48 PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING
A course dealing with the general topic and
methodology of polling. Content includes
exploration of the processes by which peo-
ple's political opinions are formed, the man-
ipulation of public opinion through the uses of
propaganda, and the American response to
politics and political issues.
D. Comparative Politics
20 EUROPEAN POLITICS
A study of the political systems of East and
West Europe with emphasis on comparison
and patterns of government. The course will
review politics in Northern (Britain. West
Germany. Sweden). Latin (France. Italy.
Spain), and Eastern (Soviet Union. East Ger-
many. Yugoslavia) Europe and attempt to find
underlying similarities and differences.
26 POLITICAL CULTURES
An exploration of the "people" aspects of
political life in several countries. The way
people interact with each other and with gov-
ernment, what they expect from the system,
how they acquire their political attitudes and
styles, and how these contribute to the type of
government. Alternate years.
38 POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS
The causes and possible cures for socio-
political backwardness in Asia, Africa, and
Latin America Alternate years.
E. International Relations
25 WORLD POLITICS
Why is there war? An introduction to interna-
tional relations with emphasis on the varieties
of conflicts which may grow into war.
27 CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS
The study of several current areas of interna-
tional tension and confiicl. including relations
among the United States. Soviet Union, and
China, plus the Middle East and whatever new
danger spots arise over lime. Alternate years.
39 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY
The U.S. role in the world in geographic.
strategic, historical, and ideological [lerspec-
tives. plus an examination of the domestic
forces shaping U.S. policy. Alternate years.
F. Special Programs
70-79 INTERNSHIPS (See index)
Students may receive academic credit for
serving as interns in structured learning situa-
tions with a wide variety of public and private
agencies and organizations. Students have
served as interns with the Public Defender's
Office, the Lycoming County Court Admin-
strator. and the Williamsport City govern-
ment.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Current studies relate to elections — local,
state, and federal — while past studies have
included Soviet and world politics.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
PSYCHOLOGY
Professor: Hancock
Associate Professor: Berthold
(Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Ryan
The major provides training in both
theoretical and applied psychology. It is
designed to meet the needs of students
seeking careers in psychology or other
natural or social sciences. It also meets
the needs of students seeking a better
understanding of human behavior as a
means of furthering individual and career
goals in other areas. Psychology majors
and others are urged to discuss course
selections in psychology with members
of the department to help insure appro-
priate course selection.
A major consists of Psychology 10,
31, 32, 36 and four other psychology
courses. Statistics also is required.
A minor in Psychology consists of
Psychology 10 and four other psycholo-
gy courses (three of which must be num-
bered 20 or above) which must be
approved by the department.
10 INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY
An introduction to the empirical study of
53
human and other animal behavior. Areas con-
sidered may mclude: learning, personality,
social, physiological, sensory, cognition, and
developmental.
12 GROUP PROCESSES AND
INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION
The introduction to the research and theory
from social psychology related to small-group
dynamics and interpersonal communication.
Topics covered will include communication
processes, interpretation of motivation, con-
ceptualization of individual personalities,
problem solving and leadership. The first
stage of the course will focus on research and
theory; the second half will emphasize the
development of skills and techniques where
.students become members of a self-analytic
— practicing the skills and making a case
study of the processes involved. Ma\ term
only.
16 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY
.An introduction to the patterns of deviant
behavior with emphasis on cause, function,
and treatment. The various models for the
conceptualization of abnormal behavior are
critically examined. Prerequisite: Pswhologv
10.
17 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
A study of the basic principles of human
growth and development throughout the life
span. Prerequisite: Psychology 10.
18 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY
The study areas will include theories of
adolescence; current issues raised by as well
as about the "generation of youth"; research
findings bearing on theones and issues of
growth beyond childhood, and self-
exploration. Prerequisite: Psychology 10.
24 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
The scientific exploration of interpersonal
communication and behavior. Topics include
attitudes and altitude change, attraction and
communication, social perception and social
influence, prosocial and antisocial behavior,
and group processes. Prerequisite: Psvcholo-
S.v 10.
25 INDUSTRIAL AND
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
The application of the pnnciples and methods
of psychology to selected industrial and or-
ganizational situations. Prerequisite: Psy-
chology 10 or consent of instructor.
32 SENSORY
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
The examination of psychophysical metho-
dology and basic neurophysiological methods
as they are applied to the understanding of
sensor processes. Prerequisites: Psychology
JO and statistics.
33 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY
An introduction to the physiological psycho-
logist's method of approach to the under-
standing of behavior as well as the set of
principles that relate the function and organi-
zation of the nervous system to the phenomena
of behavior. Prerequisite: Psychology 10 or
consent of instructor.
34 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT
Psychometric methods and theory, including
scale transformation, norms, standardization,
validation procedures, and estimation of relia-
bility. Prerequisites: Psychology 10 and sta-
tistics.
35 HISTORY AND
SYSTEMS OF PSYCHOLOGY
The growth of scientific psychology and the
theories and systems that have accompanied
its development. Prerequisite: four courses in
psychology.
36 PERSONALITY THEORY
A review of the major theories of personality
development and personality functioning. In
addition to covering the details of each theory,
the implications and applications of each
theory will be considered. Prerequisite: Psy-
chology 10.
37 COGNITION
An investigation of human mental processes
along the two major dimensions directed and
undirected thought. Topic areas include rec-
ognition, attention, conceptualization,
problem-solving, fantasy, language, dream-
ing, and creativitv. Prerequisite: Psychology
10.
38 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
An introduction to the empirical study of the
teaching-learning process. Areas considered
may mclude educational objectives, pupil and
teacher characteristics, concept learning,
problem solving and creativity, attitudes and
values, motivation, retention and transfer,
evaluation and measurement. Prerequisite:
Psychology lU or consent of instructor.
3 1 LEARNING
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
Learning processes. The examination of the
basic methods and pnnciples of animal and
human learning. Prerequisites: Psychology
10 and statistics.
39 BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION
A detailed examination of the applied analysis
of behavior. Focus will be on the application
of experimental method to the individual clini-
cal case. The course will cover targeting.
behavior, base-rating, intervention strategies.
and outcome evaluation Learning-based
modification techniques such as contingency
management, counter-conditioning, extinc-
tion, discrimination training, aversive condi-
tioning, and negative practice will be exa-
mined. Prerequisite: Psychology 10 or
consent of instructor.
41 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN
A review of contemporary theory and research
on the psychology of gender differences. The
major theories and basic research on gender
differences will be covered. Special topics
include sex differences in achievement, pow-
er, and communication; sex-role stereotypes;
beliefs about masculinity and feminity; and
gender influences on mental health. Prere-
quisite: Psychology 10.
48-49 PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY
An off-campus experience in a community
setting offenng psychological services, sup-
plemented with classroom instruction and dis-
cussion. Psychology 48 covers the basic
counseling skills, while Psychology 49 covers
the major theoretical approaches to counsel-
ing. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Internships give students an opportunity to
relate on-campus academic experiences to
society in general and to their post-
baccalaureate objectives in particular. Stu-
dents have, for example, worked in pnsons,
public and private school, county govern-
ment, and for the American Red Cross.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Independent study is an opponunily for stu-
dents to pursue special interests in areas for
which courses are not offered. In addition,
students have an opportunity to study a topic
in more depth than is possible in the regular
classroom situation. Studies in the past have
included child abuse, counseling of hospital
patients, and research in the psychology of
natural disasters.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
Honors in psychology requires original contri-
butions to the literature of psychology through
independent study. The most recent honors
project was a study of the relationship between
socio-economic status and visual versus audit-
ory learning.
RELIGION
Professor: Guerra
Associate Professor: Hughes
54
Assistant Professor: Robinson
(Chairperson)
A major consists of 10 courses,
including Religion 13, 14, and 20. At
least seven courses must be taken in the
department. The following courses may
be counted toward fulfilling the major
requirements: Greek 1 1 and 12, Hebrew
1 1 and 12. History 39 and 41, Philoso-
phy 32, and Sociology 33.
A minor in Religion consists of one
course from Religion 10, 13, 14 and four
religion courses numbered 20 or above.
An interdisciplinary minor in Biblical
Languages requires the completion of
Greek 21, 22 and Hebrew 21 and 22.
10 INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION
Designed for the beginning student, this
course examines what it means to be religious.
Some of the issues are the definition of relig-
ion, the meanmg of symbolism, concepts of
God. ecstatic phenomena. Specific attention
will be devoted to the current problem of cults
and religious liberty.
13 OLD TESTAMENT
FAITH AND HISTORY
A critical examination of the literature within
its historical setting and in the light of
archaeological findings to show the faith and
religious life of the Hebrew-Jewish commu-
nity in the Biblical period, and an introduction
to the history of interpretation with an empha-
sis on contemporary Old Testament cnticism
and theology.
14 NEW TESTAMENT
FAITH AND HISTORY
A critical examination of the literature within
its historical setting to show the faith and
religious life of the Christian community in
the Biblical period, and an introduction to the
history of interpretation with an emphasis on
contemporary New Testament criticism and
theology.
17 INTRODUCTION TO
SUPERNATURAL PHENOMENA
An examination of claims for supernatural or
paranormal phenomena with an emphasis on
critical methodology and the evaluation of
evidence. The course is designed to teach
students the difference between the scientific
and religious methodologies, the proper role
of each, and the hazards of mixing the two.
Subjects covered include ESP. Spiritualism,
the Bermuda Triangle, witchcraft, faith heal-
ing. Noah's Ark. ghosts, monsters, and
others. Offered May and summer terms only.
20 DEATH AND DYING
A study of death from personal, social, and
universal standpoints with emphasis upon
what the dying may teach the living. Principal
issues are the stages of dying, bereavement,
suicide, funeral conduct, and the religious
doctrines of death and immortality. Course
includes, as optional, practical projects with
terminal patients under professional supervi-
sion. Only one course from the combination
20-21 may be used for distribution.
21 AFTER DEATH AND DYING
An examination of the question of life after
death in terms of contemporary clinical stud-
ies, the New Testament resurrection narra-
tives, the Asian doclnne of reincarnation, and
the classical theological beliefs of providence
and predestination Religion 20 is recom-
mended but not required. Only one course
from the combination 20-21 may be used for
distribution.
22 PROTESTANTISM IN
THE MODERN WORLD
An examination of Protestant thought and life
from Luther to the present against the back-
drop of a culture rapidly changing from the
1 7th century scientific revolution to Marxism,
Darwinism, and depth psychology. Special
attention will be paid to the constant interac-
tion between Protestantism and the world in
which it finds itself.
2.^ CHRISTIAN ORIGINS
A study of the historical, cultural, and reli-
gious background of the formation of Christ-
ianity and the antecedents of Christian belief
and practice in post-exilic Judaism and in
Hellenism.
24 JUDAISM AND ISLAM
An examination of the rise, growth, and
expansion of Judaism and Islam with special
attention given to the theological contents of
the literatures of these religions as far as they
are normative in matters of faith, practice, and
organization. Also, a review of their contn-
butions to the spiritual heritage of mankind.
25 ORIENTAL RELIGION
A phenomenological study of the basic con-
tent of Hinduism. Buddhism, and Chinese
Taoism with special attention to social and
political relations, mythical and aesthetic
forms, and the East- West dialogue.
26 BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY
A study of the role of archaeology in recon-
structing the worid in which the Biblical liter-
ature originated with special attention given to
archaeological results that throw light on the
clarification of the Biblical text. Also, an
introduction to basic archaeological method
and a study in depth of several representative
excavations along with the artifacts and
material culture recovered from different his-
torical periods.
28 HISTORY AND CULTURE OF
THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST
A study of the history and culture of Mesopo-
tamia. Anatolia. Syria-Palestine, and Egypt
from the rise of the Sumerian culture to Ale-
xander the Great. Careful attention will be
given to the religious views prevalent in the
ancient Near East as far as these views inter-
acted with the culture and faith of Biblical
man.
30 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION
A study into the broad insights of psychology
in relation to the phenomena of religion and
religious behavior. The course concentrates
on religious experience or manifestations
rather than concepts. Tentative solutions will
be sought to questions such as: What does it
feel like to be religious or to have a religious
experience' What is the religious function in
human develoment? How does one think psy-
chologically about theological problems?
31 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS
A study of Christian ethics as a normative
perspective for contemporary moral problems
with emphasis upon the interaction of law and
religion, decision making in the field of
biomedical practice, and the reconstruction of
society in a planetary civilization.
32 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS
An examination of the approach of religion
and other disciplines to an issue of current
concern: current topics include the theological
significance of law, the ethics of love, and the
Holocaust. The course may be repeated for
credit if the topic is different from one previ-
ously studied.
37 BIBLICAL TOPICS
An in-depth study of Biblical topics related to
the Old and New Testaments. Topics include
prophecy, wisdom literature, the Dead Sea
Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus, Pauline theolo-
gy, Judaism and Christian origins, reaction
criticism — the way the Synoptic Gospels and
John give final form to their message. Course
will vary from year to year and may be taken
for credit a second time if the topic is different
from one previously studied.
41 CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES
A study of the theological significance of
some contemporary intellectual developments
in Western culture. The content of this course
will vary from year to year. Subjects studied in
recent years include the theological signifi-
cance of Freud. Marx, and Nietzsche: Christ-
ianity and existentialism; theology and depth
55
psychology; the religious dimension of con-
temporary literature.
42 THE NATURE AND MISSION
OF THE CHURCH
A study of the nature of the Church as "The
People of God" with reference to the Biblical,
Protestant. Orthodox, and Roman Catholic
traditions.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See mdex)
Interns in religion usually work in local chur-
ches under the super\ision of the pastor and a
member of the faculty.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Current study areas are in the Biblical lan-
guages. New Testament theology, compara-
tive religions, and the ethics of technology
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
A recent project was on the theology of hope
with reference to the thought of Ernst Bloch
and Alfred North Whitehead.
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY
Professor: McCrary
Associate Professors: Jo
(Chairperson). Wilk
Assistant Professor: Strauser
The Sociology/ Anthropology Depart-
ment offers two tracks in the major. Both
tracks introduce the students to the fun-
damental concepts of the discipline, and
both tracks prepare the student for
graduate school.
Track I emphasizes the theoretical
aspects of sociology and anthropology.
Track II emphasizes the application of
sociology and anthropology to human
services.
Track I — Sociology-Anthropology
requires the core course sequence 10, 14,
29. 44. and 47 and three other courses
within the department with the exception
of 15, 22, 23, 25, 40. and 43. Religion
26 may also be counted toward the
major.
Track II — Human Services in a
Socio-Cultural Perspective requires:
Sociology-Anthropology 10, 22, 29, 43,
44, and 47. In addition, students must
select two courses from among the fol-
lowing: Sociology-Anthropology 20,
21, 27, 28, 30, 34, and 35. Students are
also required to choose two units from
the following courses: Psychology 10.
Psychology 24, Economics 24, and
Political Science 33. Recommended
courses: Accounting 10. Accounting 26.
Spanish 10. Spanish 1 1. History 13, and
Philosophy 34.
Majors in both tracks are encouraged
to participate in the internship program.
A minor in Sociological and Anthro-
pological Views of Religion for those
interested in theology or a ministerial
career consists of four sociology-
anthropology courses from among 26,
32, 33. 36. and 46.
10 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY
An introduction to the problems, concepts,
and methods in sociology today, including
analysis of stratification, organization of
groups and institutions, social movements,
and deviants in social structure.
14 INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY
An introduction to the subfields of anthropolo-
gy; its subject matter, methodology, and
goals. Examination of biological and cultural
evolution, the fossil evidence for human evo-
lution, and questions raised in relation to
human evolution. Other topics include race,
human nature, primate behavior, and prehis-
toric cultural development.
15 INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM
An introduction to the role of law enforce-
ment, courts, and corrections in the adminis-
tration of justice; the historical development
of police, courts, and corrections; jurisdiction
and procedures of courts; an introduction to
the studies, literature, and research in criminal
justice; careers in criminal justice.
20 MARRIGE AND THE FAMILY
The history, structure, and functions of mod-
em American family life, emphasizing dating,
courtship, factors in marital adjustment, and
the changing status of family members. Pre-
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or con-
sent of instructor
21 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY
A multidisciplinary approach to the study of
the constellation of factors that relate to juve-
nile delinquency causation, handling the juve-
nile delinquent in the cnminal justice system,
treatment strategies, prevention, and commu-
nity responsibility. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor.
22 INTRODUCTION TO
HUMAN SERVICES
The course is designed for students interested
in learning about, or entering, the human
services profession. It will review the history .
the range, and the goals of human services
together with a survey of vanous strategies
and approaches to human problems. It will
include practical discussions of social beha-
vioral differences as they relate to stress and
conflict in people's lives. Prerequisite:
Sociology-Anthropology 10 andlor Psycholo-
gy 10 or consent of instructor.
23 INTRODUCTION TO
LAW ENFORCEMENT
Principles, theories, and doctrines of the law
of crimes, elements in crime, analysis of
criminal investigation, important case law.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 15 or
consent of instructor.
24 RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES
The concept of community is treated as it
operates and affects individual and group
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban set-
tings. Emphasis is placed upon characteristic
institutions and problems of modem city life.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or
consent of instructor.
25 INTRODUCTION TO
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION
This course is designed for advanced criminal
justice majors. Emphasis is placed on an in-
depth study of detection and investigation of
major crimes. Particular attention is placed on
the use of cnminalistics. legal parameters of
evidence and interrogation, and prosecutory
procedures. Prerequisite : Sociology-
Anthropology 23 or consent of instructor. Will
not he counted toward the sociologyl
anthropology major.
26 SOCIAL MOVEMENTS
An analysis of the dynamics, structure, and
reactions to social movements with focus on
contemporary social movements. Prerequis-
ite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or consent of
instructor.
27 SOCIAL PROBLEMS
The course examines the causes, characteris-
tics, and consequences of social problems in
America from diverse socio-cultural perspec-
tives. Topics discussed typically include
crime, urban cnses. family disorganization,
poverty, race problems, drug abuse, and other
related issues. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor.
28 AGING AND SOCIETY
Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics of
the aged as individuals and as members of
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables:
56
health, housing, socio-ecnomic status, per-
sonal adjustment, retirement, and social parti-
cipation. Sociological, social psychological,
and anthropological frames of reference util-
ized in analysis and description of aging and
its relationship to society, culture, and person-
ality.
29 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY
An examination of cultural and social anthro-
pology designed to familiarize the student
with the analytical approaches to the diverse
cultures of the worid. The relevancy of cultur-
al anthropology for an understanding of the
human condition will be stressed. Topics to he
covered include the nature of primitive
societies in contrast to civilizations, the con-
cept of culture and cultural relativism, the
individual and culture, the social patterning of
behavior and social control, an anthropologi-
cal perspective on the culture of the United
States.
}0 CRIMINOLOGY
Analysis of the sociology of law; conditions
under which criminal laws develop; etiology
of crime; epidemiology of crime, including
explanation of statistical distribution of cnmi-
nal behavior in terms of time, space, and
social location. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor.
3 1 SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN
A sociological examination of the role of
women in American society through an analy-
sis of the social institutions which affect their
development. Role-analysis theory will be
applied to the past, present, and future expen-
ence of women as It relates to the role options
of society as a whole. Students will do an
original research project on the role of
women. Prerequisite: Sociology -
Anthropology 10. Alternate years.
32 INSTITUTIONS
Introduces the student to the sociological con-
cept of social institution, the types of social
institutions to be found in all societies, and the
interrelationships between the social institu-
tions within a society. The course is divided
into two basic pans; I. That apsect which
deals with the systematic organization of soci-
ety in general, and 2. The concentration on a
particular social institution: economic, politi-
cal, educational, or social welfare. Prere-
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or con-
sent of instructor.
33 SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION
An examination of the major theories of the
relationship of religion to society and a survey
of sociological studies of religious behavior.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or
consent of instructor.
34 RACIAL AND
CULTURAL MINORITIES
Study of racial, cultural, and national groups
within the framework of Amencan cultural
values. An analysis will include historical,
cultural, and social factors underiying ethnic
and racial conflict. Field tnps and individual
reports are part of the requirements for the
course. Prerequisite: Sociology -
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor.
3.1 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY
Introduction to psychological anthropology.
Its theories and methodologies Emphasis will
be placed on the relationship between indivi-
dual and culture, national character, cognition
and culture, culture and mental disorders, and
cross-cultural considerations of the concept of
self. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology
29 or consent of instructor. Offered at least
once every three years.
36 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF
PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS
The course will familiarize the student with
the wealth of anthropological data on the
religions and world views developed by prim-
itive peoples. The functions of primitive
religion in regard to the individual, society,
and vanous cultural institutions will be exa-
mined. Subjects to be surveyed include myth,
witchcraft, vision quests, spirit possession,
the cultural use of dreams, and revitalization
movements. Particular emphasis will be given
to shamanism, transcultural religious experi-
ence, and the creation of cultural realities
through religions. Both a social scientific and
existentialist perspective will be employed.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 29 or
consent of instructor. Alernate years.
37 THE ANTHROPOLOGY
OF AMERICAN INDIANS
An ethnographic survey of native North
Amencan Indian and Eskimo cultures, such as
the Iroquois, Plains Indians. Pueblos. Kwa-
kiutl. and Netsilik. Changes in native lifeways
due to European contacts and United States
expansion will be considered. Recent cultural
developments among American Indians will
be placed in an anthropological perspective.
Offered at least once every three years.
38 LEGAL AND POLITICAL
ANTHROPOLOGY
The course is designed to familiarize the stu-
dent with the techniques of conflict resolution
and the utilization of public power in pnmitive
society as well as the various theories of prim-
itive law and government. The rise of the state
and an anthropological perspective on modem
law and government will be included. The
concepts of self-regulation and social control,
legitimacy, coercion, and exploitation will be
the organizing focus. Prerequisite :
Sociology-Anthropology 29 or consent of
instructor.
39 THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM
Nature and history of punishment, evolution
of the prison and prison methods with empha-
sis on prison community, prison architecture,
institutional programs, inmate rights, and
sentences. Review of punishment versus treat-
ment, detention facilities, jails, reformatories,
prison organization and administration, cus-
tody, and discipline. Prerequisite:
Sociology-Anthropology 15.
40 PROBATION AND PAROLE
.A course designed for the advanced criminal
justice major. While the course concerns the
study of probation and parole as pans of the
criminal justice system and their impact on the
system as a whole, the pnmary emphasis is the
impact on the offender. Particular attention is
given to diagnostic report wnting on offen-
ders, pre-sentence investigation, offender
classification, and parole planning. Prere-
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 15 and 39.
Alternate years.
41 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION
An analysis of stratification systems with spe-
cific reference to American society. The
course will include an analysis of poverty,
wealth, and power in the United States. Parti-
cular attention will be given to factors which
generate and maintain inequality, along with
the impacts of inequality on the lives of
Americans. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor.
43 HUMAN SERVICES
IN HELPING INSTITUTIONS
The course examines the organizational and
conceptual context within which human ser-
vices are delivered in contemporary society.
Subjects to be covered include ethnographic
study of nursing homes, prisons, therapeutic
communities, mental hospitals, and other
human service institutions. The methodology
of fieldwork will be explored so as to sensitize
the student to the socio-cultural dismensions
of helping environments and relationships.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or
Sociology-Anthropology 29 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
44 SOCIAL THEORY
The history of the development of sociological
thought from its earliest philosophical begin-
nmgs is treated through discussions and
reports. Emphasis is placed upon sociological
thought since the time of Comte. Prerequisite:
Sociology-Anthropology 10 or consent of
instructor.
45 ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY
The history of the development of anthropo-
57
logical thought Irom the IXth century to the
present. Emphasis is placed upon anthropo-
logical thought since 1X50. Topics include
esolutionism, historical-particularism, cultur-
al idealism, cultural materialism, lunctional-
isni. structuralism, and ethnoscience. Prere-
quisite: Socioloiiy-Anlhropology 29 or
conseni of inslniclor. Offered at least once
every three years.
4(1 PEOPLE AND CULTURES OF
THE AMERICAN SOUTHWEST
Field experience in the analysis of tricultural
communities ol Northern New Mexico.
Southern Colorado, and Northeastern Arizo-
na, including the eastern Pueblos of New
Mexico; Zuni. Navajo, and Apache reserva-
tions; isolated Spanish-American mountain
villages of Northern New Mexico; religious
ashrams and communes; and cities of the
Southwest and Juarez. Mexico. Emphasis
upon Taos. Rio Arriba. Sante Fe. and Los
Alamos counties of New Mexico. Prerequis-
ite: Sociology 10 or conseni of instructor. May
or summer only.
47 RESEARCH METHODS IN
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY
Study of the research process in sociology-
anthropology. Attention is given to the pro-
cess of designing and administering research
and the application of research Different
methodological skills are considered, mclud-
ing field work, questionnaire construction,
and other methods of data gathering and the
analysis of data. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 10 and Mathematical I J or
consent of instructor.
48-49 PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY
Introduces the student to a practical work
experience involving community agencies in
order to effect a synthesis of the student's
academic course work and its practical appli-
cations in a community agency. Specifics of
the course to be worked out in conjunction
with department, student, and agency. Prere-
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or con-
sent of instructor.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns in sociology-anthropology typically
work off campus with social service agencies
under the supervision of administrators. How-
ever, other internship experiences, such as
with the Lycoming County Historical
Museum, are available Interns In criminal
justice work off campus in criminal justice
agencies, such as penal institutions and prob-
ation and parole departments, under the super-
vision of administrative personnel.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
An opportunity to pursue specific interests and
topics not usually covered in regular courses.
Through a program of readings and tutorials,
the student will have the opportunity to pursue
these interests and topics in greater depth than
is usually possible in a regular course.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
THEATRE
Professor: Falk (Chairperson)
Assistant Professor; Alien
Assistant Teclinicai Director: Huffman
The major consists of eight courses:
Theatre 10 and seven others; a concen-
tration in acting, directing, or design is
possible. In addition to the course
requirements, majors are expected to
participate actively in Arena Theatre pro-
ductions. Majors are urged to include
courses in art, music, psychology, and
English, or other areas of special inter-
est.
Three minors are available in the
Theatre department. A minor in Theatre
History and Literature consists of Theat-
re 10, 32, 33, 35, and 40. The following
courses are required to complete a minor
in Performance: Theatre 10, 14, 26, 34,
36, and either 32 or 33. To obtain a minor
in Technical Theatre, a student must
complete Theatre 10, 18, 28, 38, and 42
or 43.
The fine arts distribution requirement
may be satisfied by selecting any two of
the following recommended courses:
Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18, 32, 33 or other
courses with the consent of the instruc-
tor.
10 INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE
Designed as a comprehensive introduction to
the aesthetics of theatre. From the spectator's
point of view, the nature of theatre will be
explored, including dramatic literature and the
integral functioning of acting, directing, and
all production aspects.
1 1 INTRODUCTION TO FILM
A basic course in understanding the film
medium The class will investigate film tech-
nique through lectures and by viewing regular
weekly films chosen from classic, contempor-
ary, and experimental short films.
14 INTRODUCTION TO ACTING
An introductory study of the actor's prepara-
tion with emphasis on developing the actor's
creative imagination through improvisations
and scene study.
18 INTRODUCTION TO
PLAY PRODUCTION
Stagecraft and the various other aspects of
play production are introduced. Through
material presented in the course and laborato-
ry work on the Arena Theatre stage, the stu-
dent will acquire experience to produce theat-
rical scenery.
26 INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING
An introductory study of the function of the
director in preparation, rehearsal, and perfor-
mance. Emphasis is placed on developing the
student's ability to analyze scripts, and on the
development of the student's imagination
Prerequisite: Theatre 14.
28 INTRODUCTION TO SCENE
DESIGN AND STAGECRAFT
An introduction to the theatre with an empha-
sis on stagecraft. Productions each semester
serve as the laboratory to provide the practical
experience necessary to understand the
material presented in the classroom. Prere-
quisite: Theatre Iff or conseni of instructor.
31 ADVANCED TECHNIQUES
OF PLAY PRODUCTION
A detailed consideration of the interrelated
problems and techniques of play analysis,
production styles, and design. Offered sum-
mer only.
yi HISTORY OF THEATRE I
A detailed study of the development of theatre
from the Greeks to the Restoration. Alternate
33 HISTORY OF THEATRE II
The history of the theatre from 1660. Alter-
nate years.
34 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: ACTING
Instruction and practice in character analaysis
and projection with emphasis on vocal and
body techniques. Prerequisite: Theatre 14.
35 THEORIES OF THE
MODERN THEATRE
An advanced course exploring the philosophi-
cal roots of the modem theatre from the birth
of realism to the present and the influences on
modem theatre practice. Selected readings
from Nietzsche. Marx. Jung. Freud. White-
head. Kierkegaard. Sartre. Camus. Antoine.
Copeau. Stanislavski. Shaw. Meyerhold.
Artaud. Brecht. Brook. Grotowski. Alternate
58
36 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: DIRECTING
Emphasis is placed on the student's ability to
function in preparation and rehearsal. Practi-
cal experience involves the directing of two
one-act plays from the contemporao' theatre.
Prerequisite: Theatre 26.
37 PLAYWRITING AND
DRAMATIC CRITICISM
An investigation of the techniques of play-
wntmg with an emphasis on creative writing,
culminating in a written one-act play, plus an
historical survey of dramatic criticism from
Aristotle to the present with emphasis upon
developing the student's ability to write
review s and criticism of theatncal productions
and films. Alternate years.
38 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO:
LIGHTING DESIGN
The theory of stage and lighting design with
emphasis on their practical application to the
theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or consent of
instructor.
40 MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA
An intensive and detailed analysis of the plays
and related works, including cnticism of great
authors, that have shaped world theatre.
Authors to be selected on the basis of interest
of students and faculty. At times, more than
one author will be treated in a term. Ibsen.
Brecht. Moliere. Williams. Albee. Alternate
years. May be accepted toward English major
with consent of English Department.
42 ADVANCED STUDIO:
COSTUME DESIGN
The theory of costuming for the stage, ele-
ments of design, planning, production, and
construction of costumes for the theatre. Stu-
dents will participate in the design of a pro-
duction. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or consent
of instructor.
43 ADVANCED STUDIO:
PROPERTIES DESIGN
The theory of properties design for the stage,
including the production of specific properties
for staging use. Elements of design, fabrica-
tion, and the construction of properties
employing a vanety of materials and the appli-
cation of new theatrical technology. Prere-
quisite: Theatre 18 or consent of instructor.
44 ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING
Preparation of monologues and two-character
scenes, contemporary and classical. The stu-
dent will appear in major campus productions.
Prerequisite: Theatre 34.
46 ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING
Emphasis will be placed on the student's abil-
ity to produce a major three-act play from the
scnpt to the stage for public pert'ormance.
Prerequisite: Theatre 36.
48 ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN
Independent work in conceptual and practical
design. The student will design one full pro-
duction as his major project. Prerequisites:
Theatre 28 or 38 and consent of instructor.
70-79 INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns in theatre work off campus in theatres
such as the Guthne Theatre. Minneapolis, and
at the New Jersey Shakespeare Festival.
80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Some recent independent studies have been
the roles of women as characters in drama,
scene design, and lighting design for an Arena
production.
90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
A typical study could be the writing and pro-
duction of an original play.
59
Student Services
ADMINISTRATION
The program of student services at
Lycoming is administered by the Office
of Student Services. It is designed to
respond to a diversity of student needs.
Professional staff members are assigned
the specific responsibilities of:
— career counseling and place-
ment;
— residence life;
— student activities;
— religious life;
— health services;
— study improvement services;
— student orientation;
— judiciary-student conduct
All members of the staff are available
to counsel and advise individual stu-
dents.
career trends. Services offered by the
center include:
— individual counseling;
— SHARE (Students Having a Real
Experience), a program in which
students observe and work with a
professional in the field);
— placement services to aid seniors in
implementing their career plans;
— assistance to students in securing
internships, summer employment,
and part-time employment;
— speaker's program which brings
professionals from a variety of
careers to campus seminars;
— video-cassette programs relating to
job skills and career information;
— microfiche copies of graduate- and
professional-school catalogs for
the United States and abroad.
responsibility of students occupying the
room. Hall and bathroom damage will be
the responsibility of the section where
damage occurs.
Residence halls are not available for
occupancy during the vacation periods.
Quiet hours for study purposes, which
are established by residence hall councils
or the Office of Student Services, are
published in the student handbook and
posted on bulletin boards.
Room visitation by members of the
opposite sex is permitted in the halls
under conditions established by the Col-
lege in cooperation with the various resi-
dence hall councils, which share respon-
sibility for developing and monitoring
regulations, and which are organized
each fall semester before visitation sche-
dules are established.
PERSONAL COUNSELING
All members of the staff of the Office
of Student Services are qualified and
available to provide non-therapeutic
assistance to students with adjustment
problems. A part-time clinical psycholo-
gist provides short-term therapy for stu-
dents needing assistance. Continuing
therapy is available through referral to
public agencies and private clinicians in
the Williamsport community. Financial
arrangements for these referral services
are made directly by the student with the
agency and/or individual clinician
involved.
CAREER DEVELOPMENT
SERVICES
The Career Development Center pro-
vides services which are designed to help
students identify their abilities and inter-
ests, set realistic career goals, and plan
academic programs to meet these goals.
Counseling for Lycoming students
begins in the freshman year.
In addition to individual guidance, the
center maintains a library on specific
careers, employment outlooks, and
RESIDENCE AND
RESIDENCE HALLS
Single students who do not live at home
are required to live in residence halls and
eat in the dining room. All new resident
students are forwarded a room-
agreement form to sign after confirma-
tion of their admission to Lycoming.
This agreement is renewed each spring.
Exceptions to the residence policy may
be granted to those students who wish to
live with relatives, and students who are
23 years of age or older. Requests for
such exemptions must be submitted to
the Residence Life Office before the first
day of the term to which the student has
been admitted.
Residence students assume responsi-
bility for their rooms and furnishings.
The College reserves the right to enter
and inspect any room for reasons of dam-
age, health, or safety, and to search any
room when there is reason to believe a
violation of College rules or the law is
occurring or has occurred. Charges are
assessed for damage to rooms, doors,
furniture and common areas. Wherever
possible, damage to dormitory property
will be charged to the person or persons
directly responsible. Damage and break-
age occurring in a room will be the
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
Student Activities offers assistance
and advice for all campus programs and
student organizations. Through the
efforts of the Campus Activities Board
(C.A.B.) programming is provided for
all facets of the student population. The
newly established Union Governing
Council (U.G.C.) oversees the function-
al aspecs of the Wertz Student Center and
works to create an atmosphere which
best serves the social and recreational
needs of the students. Student Activities
is also responsible for Leadership Train-
ing and the Student Orientation Staff; in
addition, it provides support and direc-
tion for student government, the Inter-
fraternity and Panhellenic councils and
the retention program.
RELIGIOUS LIFE
The United Campus Ministry, staffed
by a Protestant Minister and a Roman
Catholic Priest provide a wide range of
activities in support of the religious lives
of students. Ecumenical and inclusive in
nature, campus ministry at Lycoming
provides worship services, service pro-
jects, social occasions, retreats, study
opportunities and personal counseling
60
The chaplains Hve on campus and are
available to students for a variety of
situations in which they might need sup-
port, counsel or direction.
HEALTH SERVICES
Normal medical treatment by the
health service staff at the College is pro-
vided without cost to the student. During
the fall and spring semesters, the College
maintains an outpatient service in Rich
Hall. It is staffed with a registered nurse
five days a week from 8:30 a.m. to 4
p.m. The College physician is available
from II a.m. to 12 noon, Monday
through Friday. At other times,
emergency care is available at the
emergency rooms of Williamsport and
Divine Providence Hospitals, located a
short distance from the campus.
Medical service charges paid by the
student are: emergency room and
emergency room physician's charges,
special medications. X-rays, surgery
care for major accidents, immunizations,
examinations for glasses, physician's
visits other than in the health service,
referrals for treatment by specialists,
special nursing services and special ser-
vices.
Entering students must provide basic
health information to the College
between the time of admission and the
beginning of classes of the term to which
they are admitted. This information is
secured through participation in the com-
puterized health-information service
provided by Medical Datamation. Inc.
New students complete the DASH Medi-
cal Information Questionnaire that is
mailed to students shortly after they have
confirmed their admission to Lycoming.
The completed form is returned by the
student to the admission's office together
w ith a check for $ 1 3 .50. Both the student
and the College receive reports based on
the questionnaire responses. The student
report consists of a Medical Database
Report, a Hazards Risk Index and a
health information brochure as
requested. Information provided by the
student is confidential and is available
only to qualified health service and
student-services personnel.
A student accident and health insur-
ance program is provided through the
College. Students who do not have their
own coverage or are not included in
family coverage are required to purchase
this plan. Information on the plan is
mailed to every student.
STUDY IMPROVEMENT
SERVICES
Skills Seminars — The seminars con-
sist of three one-hour sessions on sche-
duling of time, test-taking and study
methods. They are scheduled on demand
for six to 10 students.
Reading Course — Designed to
improve reading speed and comprehen-
sion, this three- week course is offered at
various times during the academic year
for a fee of $15.
STUDENT ORIENTATION
New students at Lycoming are
required to attend one of three summer
orientation sessions with at least one
parent before they enroll in the fall. The
purpose of the program is to acquaint
new students and their parents with the
College more fully so that new students
begin their Lycoming experience under
the most favorable circumstances. Infor-
mation on orientation is mailed to new
students after they confirm their admis-
sion.
STANDARDS OF CONDUCT
Lycoming students are expected to
accept responsibilities required of adults.
The rights of every member of the Col-
lege community are protected by estab-
lished regulations. Although the accep-
tance of the College's standards of
behavior is an individual responsibility,
it also calls for group responsibility. Stu-
dents should influence their peers to con-
duct themselves responsibly for the col-
lective good.
Students who are unable to demon-
strate that they have accepted these
responsibilities or who fail to abide by
established policies may be dismissed at
any time or denied readmission for a sub-
sequent term or semester. Further, after
the conclusion of any term or semester,
the College may deny a student the pri-
vilege of attending any subsequent term
or semester when the administration
deems this to be in the best interest of the
College.
Lycoming College does not approve
of the use or misuse of alcoholic bever-
ages and encourages students to abstain
from their use and to abide by the legal
restrictions on alcohol use established by
the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Observance of the law is the individual
responsibility of each student, and fai-
lure to obey the law may subject the
student to prosecution by civil authori-
ties, either on or off campus.
Students also are expected to be aware
of the College's attitude toward the use
and misues of alcohol and to acknow-
ledge the College's right to its position.
The College will not tolerate any public
use of alcohol. Officials of the College
will prescribe penalties for the public use
or private misuse of alcohol. These
penalties will be applied in a consistent
manner.
Lycoming recognizes its responsibili-
ty, however, for providing students with
reliable information about the social and
medical implications of the use of alco-
hol. Lycoming makes every effort to
create and maintain a community in
which individual choice is coupled with
responsible behavior and respect for the
rights of others.
Upon enrolling, students are given a
handbook which contains the College's
official policies, rules and regulations.
These policies, rules and regulations are
part of the contractual agreement stu-
dents enter into when they register at
Lycoming.
61
Admission to Lycoming
POLICY AND STANDARDS
Lycoming College welcomes applica-
tions from prospective students regard-
less of age, sex. race, religion, financial
resources, color, national or ethnic ori-
gin, or handicap. Admission is based on
the following standards:
— Graduation from an accre-
dited secondary school
— Completion of 16 units of college
preparatory courses including (4)
English. (3) Math. (2) Foreign
Language, (2) Natural Science, (2)
Social Science and (3) Elective.
The admissions committee, recog-
nizing that high school curricula
vary, is always willing to consider
the application of an able student
whose preparation while differing
from the plan suggested, neverthe-
less gives evidence of continuity in
the study of fundamental subjects.
— Satisfactory College Entrance
Examination Board Scholastic
Aptitude Test (SAT) or American
College Test (ACT) scores.
Applicants with significant academic
preparation and exceptional maturity
may apply to Lycoming as a candidate
for early admission. A recommendation
from a school counselor is required, indi-
cating the student's intentions to attend
Lycoming in lieu of the 12th grade. If
admitted, the student enters the College
after completing the junior year in high
school.
Students who are not enrolled in a
degree program and who wish to register
for courses in any semester are welcome
to apply. A Special Student Application
is available for this purpose.
Lycoming is fully approved for the
educational program for veterans.
APPLICATION AND
SELECTION PROCESS
For students considering a fall semes-
ter admission, applications should be
filed by April 1 . The application should
be accompanied by a $20 application fee,
an official secondary school transcript
forwarded by the school guidance office.
and the results of either the Scholastic
Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American
College Test (ACT). Applications are
considered after April I on a space-
available basis.
The completed application is eva-
luated individually by identifying each
applicant's academic achievement,
talents, qualities, and interests. Lycom-
ing notifies applicants of their accep-
tance as soon as possible after all creden-
tials have been received and evaluated.
In some instances, additional informa-
tion may be needed to complete the eva-
luation. The review process normally
begins after January 1 .
Admitted applicants must notify the
Collegeof their intent to enroll by May 1.
the national candidates' reply date. This
notification must be accompanied by a
$100 (attendance) deposit for commut-
ing students, or a $200 (attendance and
room) deposit for resident students.
After May 1 , the deposits are not refund-
able.
ADVANCED STANDING
BY TRANSFER
The College welcomes transfer stu-
dents from other accredited colleges and
universities according to the following
standards and procedures:
— applicants should be in good
academic standing and should have
a cumulative grade point average
of 2.0 in transferable courses at
their former institutions:
— courses that are reasonably com-
parable to those offered at Lycom-
ing will be accepted for transfer if
the grade C or better is earned;
— grades earned at previous institu-
tions will not be included in the
computation of the grade point
average;
— each transfer applicant will be
evaluated individually in relation
to unsuccessfully attempted course
credits within our permitted
24-credit maximum. The number
of unsuccessful attempts remaining
will be recorded on the transcript
evaluation prior to required confir-
mation;
— class standing at Lycoming will be
based on the number of credits
accepted for transfer;
— no more than 64 credits can be
accepted for transfer from a junior
or community college:
— tranfer students will be eligible to
earn appointments to the Dean's
List, but to be considered for hon-
ors at commencement at least 64
credits must be earned at Lycom-
ing;
— students will be eligible for class
rank after completing eight courses
at Lycoming:
— official copies of transcripts from
all institutions attended must be
submitted as a part of the admis-
sions application;
— the residency requirement for a
degree is eight unit courses or 32
credits. The final eight units must
be taken at Lycoming.
EARLY DECISION
Lycoming's Early Decision Plan is
designed for qualified high school
seniors who have examined their college
choices thoroughly and have decided that
Lycoming College is their first choice.
Candidates for Early Decision may apply
elsewhere with the understanding that
other applications will be withdrawn if
the candidates are accepted at Lycoming.
It is further understood that students
select only one college to which they will
apply as Early Decision applicants.
Applications for Early Decision may
be submitted any time until December 1 .
Candidates will be notified of the Admis-
sions Committee's decision by Decem-
ber 15 providing that the credential files
are complete.
It is understood that the candidates
admitted under the Early Decision Plan
will subsequently enroll at Lycoming
responding with a deposit by January 1 .
The Admissions Committee may defer
candidates for a second review in the
spring. In such ca.ses, the Committee
62
considers additional academic informa-
tion such as senior year grades and test
scores.
ADMISSIONS OFFICE
LOCATION AND HOURS
Prospective students and their families
are encouraged to visit the campus for a
student-conducted tour and an interview
with an admissions officer, who will
provide additional information about the
College and answer questions.
The Admissions Office is located on
the first floor of Long Hall. For an
appointment, telephone (717) 326-1951.
or write Office of Admissions, Lycom-
ing College, Williamsport, PA 17701.
Office hours are:
Weekdays — September through April
8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.
— May through August
9 a.m. to 4 p.m.
Saturdays — September through April
8 a.m. to 12 noon
— May through August
No Saturday hours
63
Financial Matters
EXPENSES FOR
THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1985-86
ENTRY FEES AND DEPOSITS
Application Fee — All students for
admission must submit a $20 application
fee. This charge defrays the cost of pro-
cessing the application and is non-
refundable.
The following expenses are effective
for the regular fall and spring semesters.
The College reserves the right to adjust
fees at any time. The fees for each
semester are payable not later than the » . . . rv -^ » r j
, . f , f .1. . Admission Deposit — After students
second day oi classes tor the semester. , , ,-■ j r- ■ • j ■
^ have been notiried of their admission to
Lycoming, they are required to make a
Pggj Semester Year $100 admissions deposit to confirm their
Comprehensive S3.400 $6,800 intention to matriculate. Students seek-
Board and Room Rem 1.335 2.670 ing residence must submit an additional
T-""' ■*"'^ '^■•^™ $ Too room-reservation deposit. All
One-Time Student Fees deposits are applied to the general
charges tor the tirst semester of atten-
. PP ication " ; - dance. After May 1. deposits are nonre-
AdniisMons Deposit 100 •' ^
Contingency Deposit 100 fundable.
Room Reservation Deposit 1 00
Contingency Deposit — A con-
Part-Time Student Fees tingency deposit of SI 00 is required
Application Fee $ 20 .■ n .- ,i .• . j ^
r V 1. . /" co=n 'J' ^" tu 1-time students as a guaran-
Each Unit Course $850 , ^
tee tor payment of damage to or loss
Additional Charges »*' College property, for library and
Applied Music Fee {halt-hour per ueek parking fines, or similar penalties
per semester 120 imposed by the College. The deposit
Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost is collected alons with Other chartzes
Laboratory Fee per Unit Course 5 to 50 fyr (^e initial semester. The balance
Rereaistration Fee 25 .- ... , . . .- j j i» n
l>arkm. Permit (for the academic year) . 10 to 15 "* '^IS deposit is refunded after all
Parking Permit with Reserved Space debts to the College have been paid.
(for the academic year) 15 to 35 either upon graduation or upon writ-
Practice Teaching Fee {Payable in ten request submitted to the Registrar
D ^"T'J^^o"" r^ ,^' '***' two weeks prior to voluntary p'erma-
R.O.T.C. Basic Course Deposit .'^ . ■: ^
{Payable at Bucknell Umversiiy) 60 "ent termination ot enrollment at
R.O.T.C. Advanced Course Deposit Lycoming College.
(Payable at Bucknell University) 60
Transcript Fee ( No charge to PARTIAL PAYMENTS
(lull-time students) 3
Medical Quf^slionnaire Fee (Payable to
Medical Datamation. Inc.) prevailing cost For the convenience ofthose who find
it impossible to follow the regular sched-
The comprehensive fee covers the reg- ule of payments, arrangements may be
ular course load of three to four courses made with the College Treasurer for the
each semester. Resident students must monthly payment of College fees
board at the College unless, for extraor- through various educational plans,
dinary reasons, authorization is extended Additional information concerning par-
lor other eating arrangements. If a dou- tial payments may be obtained from the
ble room is used as a single room, there is Treasurer or Director of Admissions,
an additional charge of $265 per semes-
ter. The estimated cost for books and
supplies is up to $250 per year, depend-
ing on the course of study. Special ses-
sion (May term and summer term)
charges for tuition, room, and board are
established during the fall semester.
REFUNDS FOR STUDENTS
WHO WITHDRAW
Refunds of tuition and board are made
to students who voluntarily and officially
withdraw from the College while in good
standing according to the following sche-
dule for the fall and spring semesters and
the comparable period for the May and
summer terms:
Refund Charge
Period of Withdrawal % %
During the first week
of the semester 80 20
During the second and
third week 60 40
During the fourth and
filth week 40 60
During the sixth and
seventh week 20 80
After seven weeks 0 100
The date on which the Dean of the
College approves the student's with-
drawal form is considered the official
date of withdrawal. Charges are levied
for services provided after withdrawal.
Lycoming scholarships and grants are
applied during the fall and spring semes-
ters on the same basis as tuition charges.
If a withdrawing student is charged 60%
tuition, he/she will receive 60% of the
scholarship or grant. Government finan-
cial aid is adjusted according to federal
and state guidelines.
Room charges which are established
on a .semester basis, and special charges,
such as laboratory fees, are not refund-
able if a student leaves the College prior
to the end of the semester.
Full-time students who after reducing
their loads continue to be enrolled for 1 2
or more semester hours are not eligible
for a refund of tuition for an individual
course. Similarly, students who register
for extra hours in excess of 16 hours per
semester and who later reduce their loads
are not eligible after the fifth day of the
semester for a refund of the fee charged
for overloads. Charges will be recalcu-
lated for students who enroll full time
and subsequently assume part-time sta-
tus by reducing their loads below 12
hours during the drop-add period. The
assumption of a part-time status normal-
ly involves a substantial reduction of
financial aid since most financial aid
programs do not extend eligibility to
part-time students.
64
NON-PAYMENT OF
FEES PENALTY
Students will not be registered for
courses in a new semester if their
accounts for previous attendance have
not been settled. Diplomas, transcripts,
and certifications of withdrawals in good
standing are issued only when a satisfac-
tory settlement of all financial obliga-
tions has been made in the Business
Office.
FINANCIAL AID
POLICY AND PROCEDURES
The dominant factor in determining
the amount of financial aid awarded to
individual students is the establishment
of need. Scholarships may be awarded
on the basis of financial need and
academic ability, while grants are pro-
vided on the basis of financial need.
Long-term, low-cost educational loans
are available from federal and state sour-
ces to most students who can demon-
strate need. Part-time employment is
available to students.
To apply for financial assistance.
obtain Lycoming's Financial Aid Appli-
cation (FAA) from the Financial Aid
Office and the CSS Financial Aid Form
(FAF) and your State Grant Application
from your secondary school Guidance
Office or Lycoming's Financial Aid
Office. Submit the FAA to Lycoming
and the completed FAF to the College
Scholarship Service. Box 2700. Prince-
ton. NJ 08541 . as early as possible after
January I . Renewal applications are
required annually.
SCHOLARSHIPS AND GRANTS
Valedictorian/Salutatorian Scho-
larship is a $2,400 award honoring gra-
duates of private and public secondary
schools who rank either first or second in
their graduating class as certified by their
guidance counselor. These awards are
based upon academic achievement and
are not contingent upon demonstrated
financial need. Renewal cumulative
average is 3.00.
Lycoming Recognition Scholarships
for $700 to $ 1 ,000 per year are awarded
to freshmen who have superior academic
qualifications, have filed the FAF but did
not demonstrate financial need as deter-
mined by the College Scholarship Ser-
vice and were not eligible for another
Lycoming scholarship program. This
scholarship is renewable if the recipient
maintains a 3.25 cumulative average.
Lycoming Directors' Scholarships
of $400 to full tuition, depending upon
financial need, are awarded to students in
the top fifth of their secondary school
class with CEEB scores totaling 1 100 or
more. Renewal cumulative average is
3.00.
President's Fellowships in Music are
awarded annually to students who are
skilled in singing or in playing the piano
and wish to continue performing,
whether or not they intend to become
music majors. To be eligible for consid-
eration, a candidate must apply and be
accepted by Lycoming College and
audition with the Music Department.
The amount of each fellowship is $250
per semester, renewable to a maximum
of $2,000 per student. The primary
responsibility of each Fellow is musical
performance as assigned by the Music
Department. Singing in a chamber choir,
accompanying in a voice studio, playing
for chapel services, or rehearsing a musi-
cal comedy are typical opportunities.
Lycoming Grant-in-Aid awards of
$400 to full tuition, depending upon
financial need, are made to full-time
students who do not qualify for scholar-
ships and who have demonstrated finan-
cial need and the prospect of contributing
positively to the College community.
Renewal requires continued financial
need and satisfactory citizenship stan-
dards.
Ministerial Grants are awarded to
dependent children of United Methodist
ministers and practicing ordained minis-
ters of other denominations. The grants
amount to one-third of tuition for chil-
dren of United Methodist Ministers in the
Central Pennsvlvania Annual Confer-
ence and one-fourth of tuition for all
others. If a student completes the FAF.
this grant will be part of the total aid
award.
Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of
one-fourth of tuition are awarded to stu-
dents preparing for the Christian ministry
who are enrolled full time and demon-
strate financial need. Students must com-
plete the pre-ministerial application
available through the Financial Aid
Office.
Women of Lycoming Scholarship is
an aw ard available to a currently enrolled
female memberof the junior class having
completed 80 credit hours with at least a
3.0 cumulative average and who demon-
strates financial need of at least the regu-
lar tuition rate. Applications are avail-
able in the Financial Aid Office in
February and are due in March. The
award is normally $500 and is based on
current earnings of the scholarship
endowment.
Two-in-Family Grants are awarded
to each member of a family attending
Lycoming College at the same time. The
amount is 10% of tuition, room, and/or
board paid. Each member must be
enrolled full time and not eligible for any
other financial aid program of the Col-
lege. If a student is eligible for other
Lycoming aid, the student would receive
whichever is areater.
United Methodist Scholarships are
awarded to applicants who are in the top
one-third of their class, active in Chris-
tian activities, and have demonstrated
financial need. The awards are normally
$500 per year and the funds are provided
by the United Methodist Church. Annual
application is required. The student must
complete and file the FAF and the scho-
larship forms which are available in the
Financial Aid Office.
Wyoming Conference Scholarship
of $500 is granted by Lycoming to a
student chosen by the Scholarship Com-
mittee of the Wyoming Conference.
These scholarships are renewable for
three additional years. Good academic
performance and service to the church
are the criteria for this award.
C. Luther Culler Scholarship for
$500 is available based on scholarship.
65
Dewitt-Bodine Scholarships are
awarded to the highest-ranked student in
the graduating class each year from
Hughesville High School who attends
Lycoming College. The recipient is
designated by the Hughesville guidance
director. The scholarship amount is
$2,200 and is credited at $550 per year
over four years of attendance at Lycom-
ing. If the student is in a three-year pro-
gram (such as Med-Tech), the student
will receive the award divided equally
over the three years of attendance at
Lycoming.
Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarships
are awarded to the highest-ranked stu-
dent in the graduating class each year
from Line Mountain High School who
attends Lycoming College. The recipient
is designated by the high school's gui-
dance office. The scholarship is $400 per
year for up to four years' attendance at
Lycoming.
James A. Heether Scholarship for
$300 is available based on financial
need. Priority will be given to a chemis-
try major.
George W. HuntleVi Jr. Scholar-
ship for $700 is available to help defray
the tuition and expenses for the first year
only of any graduate of Cameron County
High School (formerly Emporium High
School). The selection is made by the
superintendent of schools.
Robert F. Rich Scholarship is
awarded periodically to an academically
outstanding student from Central Penn-
sylvania. The award varies from $200 to
$1,200 depending upon the available
scholarship endowment income. Prefer-
ence is given to a resident of the Wool-
rich area and children of the employees
of the Woolrich Company.
Leonard H. Rothermel Fund pro-
vides $1,200 in financial aid to needy
students, who are in satisfactory
academic standing with primary prefer-
ence given to Trevorton residents and
second preference given to Line Moun-
tain School District area residents.
Samuel Willard Memorial Scholar-
ships are awarded to a junior or senior
student at Lycoming who is in need of
financial assistance to complete his/her
decree. Preference is given to a religion
major. The award varies between $300
and $600 depending upon available
scholarship endowment income.
FEDERAL AID
Pell Grant — This federal grant pro-
vides up to $2, 100 per year for full-time
students who can demonstrate financial
need. Application can be made when
submitting the Financial Aid Form
(FAF). the"PHEAA State Grant Appli-
cation, or by separate federal application
on forms which are available in secon-
dary school guidance offices or the
Financial Aid Office at Lycoming. All
students are urged to apply for this pro-
gram.
Supplemental Educational Oppor-
tunity Grants (SEOG) — This federal
government program provides additional
assistance to those students with finan-
cial need. Awards can be made in
amounts ranging from $200 to $2,000
and are usually based entirely on excep-
tional financial need. Renewal is possi-
ble if the applicant has no reduction in
financial need in succeeding years.
National Direct Student Loan
(NDSL) — This federal five percent
interest loan permits a total of $6,000 to
be borrowed by the undergraduate stu-
dent at a rate not to exceed $3,000 the
first two years. Repayment does not
begin until 6 months after graduation or
withdrawal from college. Loans are nor-
mally renewed annually if the applicant
files a renewal application by May 1 and
continues to demonstrate financial need.
Federal College Work Study Grants
(CWSP) — An opportunity is provided
through this program for students to earn
part of their college expenses and to gain
some practical experience by working on
campus. Federal government financial-
need guidelines must be met to be eligi-
ble for this program. Students who do not
meet these guidelines should consult
with the Career Development Center or
Financial Aid Office for other employ-
ment opportunities.
STATE GRANTS
State Grants — All applicants for
financial aid are urged to investigate
programs sponsored by their home states
and to learn about and heed application
deadlines. Pennsylvania students should
apply for a PHEAA State Grant before
April 30. The PHEAA State Grant pro-
vides up to $1 .500 to eligible Pennsylva-
nia residents who are in need of financial
aid. Residents of other states may be
eligible for grant assistance through their
states. A few of these states are Dela-
ware. Maryland. Ohio, Rhode Island,
and West Virginia. Applications should
be available through your high school
guidance office.
Scholars in Education Awards
(SEA) were developed by PHEAA to
help remedy the need for teachers of
science and math in Pennsylvania secon-
dary schools. If you are a highly quali-
fied high school senior who wishes to
teach math or science as a career, and if
you meet the qualifications set by
PHEAA. you could receive an award of
507f of your annual tuition. You must
agree to teach math or science in a Penn-
sylvania secondary school if you accept
the award, and if you fail to keep this
commitment, repay the grant as a loan
plus interest. Check with your high
school guidance counselor.
LOANS
State Guaranteed Loans — Most
states, including Pennsylvania. New
Jersey, and New York, provide state
guaranteed loans through local banks and
lending institutions. This program pro-
vides 8 percent interest loans of up to
$2,500 per academic level for education-
al expenses with repayment extended
over a long-term schedule. Applicants
should consult local banks early in their
senior year.
PLUS Loans — PLUS Loans are
meant to provide additional funds for
educational expen.ses. The interest rate is
12 percent. Parents of dependent under-
graduate students may borrow up to
$3,000 per year. Independent undergra-
66
duates may borrow up to $2,500 per
year; however, for independent students,
the PLUS loan, combined with any GSL
the undergraduate may have for that
level, cannot exceed $2,500. Applica-
tions and information are available from
your bank or other lending institution.
PHEAA Family Partnership Loans
are made available to families who can-
not borrow sufficient funds through
Guaranteed Student Loan (GSL). Loans
range from $2,000 to $5,500. Pennsyl-
vania residents and students from other
states attending a PA college are eligible
to apply. For PA residents consideration
is automatically given when you file a
PHEAA GSL application. Out-of-state
students should contact the Financial Aid
Office for application information.
OTHER SOURCES OF AID
Community Scholarships — In
many communities, foundations, organi-
zations, and in some cases high schools,
provide funds for worthy students.
Applicants should consult with their
guidance counselor or principal.
Education Financing Plans — The
Business Office at Lycoming provides
information about plans which enable
parents to pay College expenses on a
monthly basis through selected compa-
nies.
Pennsylvania National Guard —
Students participating in this program
may be eligible for scholarship, credit
programs, educational bonus, or loan
repayment. Contact a Guard Unit in your
area for more information.
Reserve Officers Training Corps
(ROTO Scholarships — Students who
participate in Army ROTC are eligible
for three-, two-, and one-year ROTC
scholarships to finance tuition, books,
laboratory fees, and other charges with
the exception of room and board. ROTC
Scholarship students also receive $100
per month during the academic year.
Reserve Officers Training Corps
(ROTC) Stipends — Students who par-
ticipate in the Army ROTC program
receive an annual stipend of $1 .000 dur-
ing their junior and senior years. They
also receive half of a second lieutenant's
pay plus travel expenses for a six-week
advanced summer camp between junior
and senior years.
Tuition Exchange Grants —
Lycoming College is a member of both
the Tuition Exchange Program and the
CIC Tuition Exchange Program. These
programs are for dependent students of
employees at participating institutions of
higher education. You should contact the
Tuition Exchange Officer at your host
institution for information regarding
sponsorship.
67
The Campus
Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's
20-acre main campus. Most buildings
have been constructed since 1950. even
though Lycoming — one of America's
50 oldest colleges and universities —
dates back to 1812. All buildings are
easy to reach from anywhere on campus.
A 12-acre athletic field and football sta-
dium lie a few blocks north of the main
campus.
Modern buildings include the eight
residence halls, which contain clean and
comfortable single and double rooms;
the library; the student union; and the
physical education/recreation center.
Up-to-date facilities include the theatre,
the planetarium, the computer center, an
electronic-music studio, a photography
laboratory, and an art gallery. The com-
puter center opened in 1969; the art gal-
lery and physical education center
opened in 1980. An arts center was reno-
vated and opened in 1983.
RESIDENTIAL
Asbury Hall (1962) — Sleeps 1 54 stu-
dents. Named in honor of Bishop Francis
Asbury. the father of The United
Methodist Church in America, who
made the circuit through the upper Sus-
quehanna District in 1812, the year
Lycoming (then the Williamsport
Academy) opened its doors.
Crever Hall (1962) — Sleeps 126 stu-
dents in two-room suites with bath. Hon-
ors Lycoming's founder and first finan-
cial agent, the Rev. Benjamin H. Crever.
who helped persuade the Baltimore Con-
ference to purchase the school from the
Williamsport Town Council in 1848.
East Hall (1962) — Houses most of the
chapters of Lycoming's national frater-
nities and other students. The self-
contained fraternity units each contain
rooms, a lounge, and a chapter room. All
students share a large social area.
Forrest Hall (1968) — Sleeps 92 stu-
dents in two-room suites with bath. Hon-
ors Dr. and Mrs. Fletcher Bliss Forrest
and Anna Forrest Burfiendt '30, the
parents and sister of Katherine Forrest
Mathers '28, whose generosity estab-
lished the memorial.
Rich Hall (1948) — Sleeps 105 students
in two-room suites with bath. Honors the
Rich family of Woolrich, Pennsylvania.
Houses the health service and the Sara J.
Walter Lounge for commuting students.
Skeath Hall (1965) — The largest resi-
dence hall, it sleeps 212 students. Hon-
ors the late J. Milton Skeath. professor of
psychology and four-time Dean of the
College tYom 1921 to 1967.
Wesley Hall (1956) — Sleeps 144 stu-
dents. Honors John Welsey. the founder
of Methodism.
Williams Hall (1965) — Sleeps 146 stu-
dents in two-room suites with bath. Hon-
ors Mary Ellen Whitehead Williams,
mother of Joseph A. Williams, of St.
Marys. Pennsylvania, whose bequest
established the memorial.
ACADEMIC
Academic Center (1968) — Probably the
most architecturally impressive building
on campus, the center actually is com-
posed of four buildings; the library.
Wendle Hall, the Arena Theatre and
laboratories, and the faculty office
building.
Library: Contains more than 150,000
volumes and up to 1 ,000 periodical
titles, the Art Gallery, the computer
center, a nursing skills laboratory,
and a comfortable lounge that is util-
ized for study and special events. It
can accommodate 700 students, and
serves as a federal repository.
Art Gallery (1980:) Located in the
northwest comer of the first floor of
the library, the gallery contains exhi-
bits year-round, including shows of
student work.
Computer Center (1979): Located in
the basement of the library, the center
hou.ses a DEC PDPI 1/70 primary unit
and Commodore, Radio Shack and
APPLE micro-computers. The prim-
ary unit is equipped with the RSTS-E
operating system, 1 .25 Mega-bytes of
main memory, 134 Mega-bytes disk
storage, and 14 remote terminals for
student use. The center has computer
graphics capability.
Nursing Skills Laboratory (1983):
Located in the lower level of the
library, it is a replica of a modem
hospital ward, complete with 10
simulated work stations, a nurses'
station, and all the medical equipment
used by nurses.
Wendle Hall: Contains 20 class-
rooms, the psychology laboratories,
and spacious Pennington Lounge, an
informal meeting place for students
and faculty.
Arena Theatre and Laboratories:
The 204-seat thrust-stage theatre is
one of the finest in the region. It
includes projection facilities, scene
and costume shops, a make-up room,
and a multiple-use area known as the
Down Stage, where one-act experi-
mental plays are performed. The lan-
guage, business, mathematics, and
physics laboratories are situated on
the upper floors. The Detwiler Plane-
tarium is located on the ground floor.
Faculty Office Building: Contains
faculty offices, seminar rooms, and a
735-seat lecture hall.
Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated
1983) — Contains studios, sculpture
foundry, woodshop, printmaking shop,
classrooms, lecture hall, offices.
Photographic Laboratory (1984):
Located in the lower level of the Fine
Arts Center, it contains all the mater-
ials and equipment of any commercial
laboratory .
Science Building (1957) — Includes the
biology and chemistry laboratories,
classrooms, faculty offices, a lecture
hall, and a greenhouse.
Clarke Building (1939) — Includes
recital hall, music classrooms, practice
studios, an electronic-music studio,
faculty offices, two chapels, and the
United Campus Ministry Center.
ADMINISTRATION
John W. Long Hall (1951) — Opened
originally as the library, it now houses
the administrative offices, including
those for the president, dean, treasurer.
68
registrar, admissions, alumni affairs,
public relations, institutional advance-
ment, career development, publications,
and financial aid. It includes a reception
area, central communications, and the
printing and bulk mail office.
RECREATION
Physical Education and Recreation
Center (1980) — Includes the George R.
Lamade Gymnasium, uhich contains
basketball and other courts; a six-lane
swimming pool; all-purpose room; sauna
and steam room; weight room; offices;
classrooms, and Alumni Lounge.
Wertz Student Center {1959}'— Con-
tains the main and private dining rooms,
Burchfield Lounge, a recreation area,
game rooms, music room, theatre, cafe
with stage, bookstore, post office, stu-
dent organization offices, and FM radio
station. Honors Bishop D. Frederick
Wertz. president of Lycoming from 1955
to 1968.
RELIGIOUS
Clarke Building (1939) — Lycoming's
landmark, the building contains Clarke
Chapel. St. John Neumann Chapel, the
United Campus Ministry Center, and
music department studios and offices.
69
Academic Calendar: 1985-86
Fall Semester
Bills are due Ausust 22
Orientation of new faculty August 23
Residence halls open August 25
Faculty available for advising August 26
Classes begin first period August 27
Processing of drop/add begins August 27
Re-registration fee of $25 applies after this date September 2
Last day for drop/add September 2
Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades September 2
Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades
were recorded in Spring, May. and summer terms October 7
Mid-semester deficiency reports for freshmen due in Registrar's Office at noon October 14
Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades
were recorded in fall semester
Preregistration for students who have completed at least one semester October 29-31
Preregistration for sophomores and juniors
Preregistration for freshmen November 8-9
Last day to withdraw from courses with W. WP. WF grades November 18
Residence halls close at 10 a.m. for Thanksgiving recess November 27
Residence halls open at noon after Thanksgiving December 1
Classes resume first period after Thanksgiving December 2
Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for spring recess
Residence halls open at noon after spring recess
Classes resume first period after spring recess
Final examinations begin December 9
Semester ends at 5 p.m December 13
Residence halls close at 9 p.m December 13
May term
Residence halls open May 4
Classes begin May 5
Last day for drop/add May 6
Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades May 6
Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP, WF grades May 23
Term ends May 30
Residence halls close at 4 p.m May 30
Spring semester
January 2
January 5
January 6
January 6
January 10
January 10
Januarv 10
February 21
February 14
March 26, 27
April 1-2
April 4
February 2
March 9
March 10
April 21
April 25
April 25
Summer term
June I
June 2
June 4
June 4
June 27
July 4
July II
Special dates to remember:
Freshman convocalion AuiiusI 27
All-College picnic August 31
Labor Day (classes In session) September 2
Honiecommg Weekend September 27-29
Parents Weekend October 11-12
Long weekend (classes suspended) October 25
Thanksgiving recess November 27-December 2
Spring recess February 28-.March 4
Good Friday (afternoon classes suspended) March 2X
Honors Day April 8
Baccalaureate May 4
Commencement May 4
Memorial Day (no classes) May 26
Independence Day (no classes) July 4
70
Directory
BOARD OF TRUSTEES
Officers
Harold H. Shreckengast. Jr Chairman
Nathan W . Stuart. i.D Vice Chairman
Paul G. Giimore Secretary
William L. Baker Treasurer
W. Gibbs McKenney. LL.D., L.H.D Chairman Emeritus
Fred A. Pennington. LL.D Chairman Emeritus
Honorary Trustees
Bishop Hermann W. Kaebnick. D.D.. L.H.D. , LL.D Hershey
Ralph E. Kelchner Jersey Shore
Arnold A. Phipps. II Williamsport
George L. Steams, II Williamsport
W. Russell Zacharias Allentown
Trustees
Elected Term expires 1986
1983 John T. Detwiler Williamsport
1980 Richard W. DeWald Montoursville
1974 Daniel G. Fultz Pittsford. NY
1965 James G. Law. D. Text. Sci Bloomsburg
1970 John E. Person. Jr Williamsport
1983 Marv R. Schweikle. M.D. (Alumni Representative) Montoursville
1972 Donald E. Shearer. M.D Montoursville
1983 Hon. Clinton W. Smith Williamsport
1961 Nathan W. Stuart. J.D Williamsport
1971 Willis W. Willard. III. M.D Hershey
Elected Term expires 1987
1984 Hon. Robert W. Edgar. LL.D. (Alumni Representative) Glen Riddle
1969 Samuel H. Evert... ^ Bloomsburg
1972 The Rev. Brian A. Fetterman Williamsport
1978 Harold D. Hershberger, Jr Williamsport
1978 JohnC. Lundy Williamsport
1984 D. Stephen Martz Duncansville
1981 William Pickelner Williamsport
1978 John Y. Schreyer Little Falls. NJ
1985 Robert L. Shangraw Williamsport
1972 Harold H. Shreckengast. Jr. Jenkintown
Elected Term expires 1988
1979 David Y. Brouse Salem. MA
1951 Paul G. Gilmore Williamsport
1985 Seth D. Keller (Alumni Representative) Williamsport
1982 Margaret D. L'heureux Williamsport
1973 Robert G. Little. M.D Hamsburg
1964 W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D.. L.H.D Baltimore. MD
1973 G. Jackson Miller Altoona
1958 Fred A. Pennin2ton. LL.D Mechanicsburg
1982 Marguerite G. Rich Woolrich
1961 The Rev. Wallace F. Stettler. HH.D Kingston
1982 The Rev. Stratford C. Tavlor Montoursville
71
ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF
FREDERICK E. BLUMER (1976)
President
B.A.. Mill saps College:
B.D.. Ph.D.. Emory Universit}'
SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979)
Dean of the College
B.A.. Mundelein College: M.A.. Northwestern Universirs':
M.A.. Ph.D.. Ulli^■ersiT^■ of Chicago
WILLIAM L. BAKER (1965)
Treasurer
B.S., Lycoming College
JACK C. BUCKLE (1957)
Dean of Student Services
A.B.. Juniata College: M.S.. Syracuse Universiry
J. BARTON MEYER (1984)
Executive Director for
College Advancement
B.A.. Ohio Northern Universitx;
M.S.. University^ of Dayton
BETTY S. BECK (1965)
Bookstore Manager
DALE V. BOWER (1968)
Director of Planned Giving
B.S.. Lycoming College:
B.D. United Theological Seminary
GEORGE W. BRELSFORD (1982)
Assistant to the
Dean of Student Services
B.S.. Davis & Elkins College
RITA A, CIURLINO (1984)
Admissions Counselor
A.B.. Lycoming College
ROBERT L. CURRY (1969)
Assistant Director of Athletics
A.B., Lycoming College
JOANNE B. DAY (1981)
Associate Dean of Student Services
B.A.. M.Ed.. Western Maryland College
ROBERT L. EDDINGER (1967)
Director of Buildings & Grounds
FRANK L. GIRARDM1984)
Director of Athletics
B.S.. West Chester State College
FRED L. GROGAN (1977)
Assistant Dean of the College
A.B.. Bates College: M.A.. Arizona State
Universitx: Ph.D.. University of Missouri
THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966)
Director of Computer Services
6.5.. Wake Forest College:
M.A.. University of Kansas
MARY E. HERRING (1978)
Director of Admissions
B.A.. Albright College
RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970)
Chaplain of the College
B.A.. Indiana Central College:
S.T.B.. Ph.D., Boston University
BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982)
Director of Library Services
B.A.. The Citadel:
M.S.L.S.. Florida State University
HAROLD H. HUTSON (1969)
President Emeritus
B.A.. LL.D.. Wofford College: B.D.. Duke Universitx.
Ph.D.. University of Chicago:
L.H.D.. Ohio Wesley an University
JOHN G. LAMADE (1983)
Assistant Director of Admissions
B.A.. Susquehanna University
MARK N. LEVINE (1985)
Director of Public Relations
B.A.. The American University:
M.S. J.. Northwestern University
MARIE J. LINDHORST (1984)
Campus Minister
A.B.. Vassar College:
M.Div.. Yale Divinity School
BETTY J. PARIS (1963)
Registrar
A.B.. Lycoming College
JULIANN T. PAWLAK (1979)
Director of Financial Aid
A.B.. Lycoming College:
M.A., Bucknell University
JEFFREY L. RICHARDS (1982)
Controller and Assistant Treasurer
A.B.. Lycoming College
GORDON S. STEARNS (1982)
Assistant to the Dean of Student Services
B.A.. Bowdoin College
NED E. STRAUSER (1984)
Admissions Counselor
A.B.. Lycoming College
DEBORAH E. WEAVER (1978)
Administrative Assistant for Residence Life
RALPH E. ZEIGLER, JR. (1980)
Director of Alumni and Parent Relations
A.B.. Lycoming College:
M.A.. The Penn.sylvania State University
JEROME M. ZUFELT (1984)
Assistant Director of Public Relations
B.S.. Boston Universitx
72
FACULTY
EMERITI
MABEL K. BAUER
Professor Emeritus of Chemistry
B.S.. Cornell University:
M.S.. University of Pennsylvania
LEROY F. DERR
Professor Emeritus of Education
A.B.. Ursinus College: M.A.. Biicknell University:
Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh
ROBERT H. EWING
Professor Emeritus of History
A.B.. College of Wooster: M. A.. University
of Michigan: HH.D.. Lycoming College
JOHN P. GRAHAM
Professor Emeritus of English
Ph.B.. Dickinson College:
M.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State Universir\-
HAROLD W. HAYDEN
Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus
of Library Services
A.B.. Nebraska Slate Teachers College: B.S.. University
of Illinois: M.A. in L.S.. University of Michigan
GEORGE W. HOWE
Professor Emeritus of Geology
A.B.. M.S.. Syracii.se University:
Ph.D.. Cornell University
M. RAYMOND JAMISON
Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics
B.S.. Ursinus College: M.S.. Bucknell Universit}'
GERTRUDE B. MADDEN
Associate Professor Emeritus of English
A.B.. University of Pennsylvania:
M.A.. Bucknell University
WALTER G. McIVER
Professor Emeritus of Music
Mus.B.. Westminster Choir College: A.B.. Bucknell
University: M.A.. New York University
DONALD G, REMLEY
Assistant Professor Emeritus of
Mathematics and Physics
A.B., Dickinson College: M.A.. Columbia Universit}'
MARY LANDON RUSSELL
Associate Professor Emeritus of Music
Mus. B.. Susquehanna University Conservatoiy of
Music: M.A.. The Pennsylvania State University
LOUISE R. SCHAEFFER
Associate Professor Emeritus of Education
A.B.. Lycoming College: M.A.. Bucknell Univer.sity:
D.Ed.. The Pennsxlvania State University
JAMES W. SHEAFFER
Associate Professor Emeritus of Music
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania:
M.S., Universin- of Pennsylvania
FRANCES K. SKEATH
Professor Emeritus of Mathematics
A.B.. M.A.. Bucknell University:
D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State Utiiversity
JOHN A. STUART
Professor Emeritus of English
B.A.. William Jewell College:
M.A., Ph.D.. Northwestern University
HELEN B. WEIDMAN
Professor Emeritus of Political Science
A.B.. M.A.. Bucknell University:
Ph.D.. Syracuse University
PROFESSORS
ROBERT F. FALK (1970)**
Theatre
Marshal of the College
B.A.. B.D.. Drew University:
M.A.. Ph.D.. Wayne State University
MORTON A. FINEMAN (1966)***
Physics
A.B.. Indiana University:
Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh
ERNESTO. GIGLIO (1972)
Political Science
B.A.. Queens College: M.A.. SUNY at Albany:
Ph.D.. Syracuse Universits-
EDUARDO GUERRA (1960)
Religion
B.D.. Southern Methodist Universit}': S.T.M..
Ph.D., Union Theological Seminary
JOHN G. HANCOCK (1967)
Psychology
B.S.. M.S.. Bucknell University:
Ph.D.. The Pennsylvania State University
JOHN G. HOLLENBACK (1952)
Business Administration
B.S.. M.B.A.. University of Pennsylvania
JAMES K. HUMMER (1962)
Chemistry
B.N.S.. Tufts University: M.S.. Middlebuiy College:
Ph.D.. University of North Carolina
JACK S. McCRARY (1969)
Sociology
B.A.. M.A.. Southern Methodist University:
Ph.D.. Washington University
73
ROGER W. OPDAHL (1963)
Economics
A.B.. Hofstra Universin: M.A.. Columbia Uni\ersit\-:
D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania Stale Univer.sin
JOHN F. PIPER. JR. (1969)
History
A.B., Lafayette College: B.D.. Yale University:
Ph.D.. Duke University
ROBERT W. RABOLD ( 1955)
Economics
B.A.. The Pennsylvania State University;
M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh
JOHN A. RADSPINNER (1957)
Chemistry
B.S.. University of Richmond: M.S.. Virginia
Polytechnic Institute: D.Sc. Carnegie-Mellon University-
LOGAN A. RICHMOND ( 1954)
Accounting
B.S.. Lycoming College: M.B.A.. New York Universit^■:
C.P.A. t Pennsylvania)
JANET A. RODGERS (1981)
Nursing
B.S.. Wagner College: M.A.. Ph.D..
New York University'
SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979)
English
Dean of the College
B.A., Mundelein College: M.A.. Northwestern
University: M. A.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago
**On Sabatical Spring Semester 1986
***0n Leave of Absence 1985-86
ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS
ROBERT B. ANGSTADT (1967)
Biology
B.S.. Ursinus College:
M.S.. Ph.D.. Cornell Universit\-
HOWARD C. BERTHOLD, JR. (1976)
Psychology
B.A.. Franklin and Marshall College: M.A. University
of Iowa: Ph.D.. The University of Mas.sachusetts
JON R. BOGLE (1976)
Art
B.F.A.. B.S.. M.F.A.. Tvler School of Art:
Temple Universir^-
CLARENCE W. BURCH (1962)
Physical Education
B.S.. M.Ed.. University of Pittsburgh
JACK D. DIEHL. JR. (1971)**
Biology
6.5.. M.A.. Sam Houston State University:
M.S., Ph.D.. University of Connecticut
RICHARD R. ERICKSON (1973)
Astronomy and Physics
B.A.. University of Minnesota:
M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago
BERNARD P. FLAM ( 1963)
Spanish
A.B., New York University: M.A.. Harvard Universirs-:
Ph.D.. University of Wisconsin
DAVID A. FRANZ (1970)
Chemistry
A.B.. Princeton University: M.A.T.. The Johns
Hopkins University: Ph.D.. Universit^^ of Virginia
CHARLES L. GETCHELL (1967)
Mathematics
B.S.. Universit}- of Massachusetts:
M.A.. Ph.D.. Harvard Universit}'
STEPHEN R. GRIFFITH (1970)
Philosophy
A.B.. Cornell Universit}':
M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh
DAVID K. HALEY (1980)
Mathematics
B.A.. Acadia University: M.S.. P.D.. Queen's
University: Hahil.. Universitat Mannheim
RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970)**
Religion
B.A.. Indiana Central College:
S.T.B.. Ph.D.. Boston University
BRUCE M. HURLBERT ( 1982)
Director of Library Services
B.A.. The Citadel: M.S.L.S.. Florida State Universit^■
EMILY R. JENSEN (1969)
English
B.A., Jamestown College: M.A.. Universit}- of Denver:
Ph.D.. The Pennsylvania State University-
MOON H. JO (1975)
Sociology
B.A.. Valparaiso Universit}-: M.A.. Howard University:
Ph.D., New York Universit}-
FORREST E. KEESBURY ( 1970)
Education
B.S.. Defiance College: M.A.. Bowling Green State
Universin-: E.D.. Lehigh Universitx
ROBERT H. LARSON ( 1969)
History
B.A.. The Citadel: M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Virginia
PAUL A. MacKENZIE (1970)
German
A.B.. A.M.. Ph.D.. Boston Universit}-
ROBERT J.B. MAPLES (1969)
French
A.B., Universit}- of Rochester: Ph.D.. Yale University
74
RICHARD J. MORRIS (1976)
GARY M. BOERCKEL (1979)
History
Music
B.A.. Boston State College: M.A.. Ohio
B.A.. B.M.. Oberlin College: M.M.. Ohio University:
Ulliversit^•: Ph.D.. New York University
D.M.A.. University of Iowa
DAVID J. RIFE (1970)**
ROSE MARIE BOROCH ( 1984)
English
Nursing
B.A.. University of Florida: M.A.. Ph.D..
B.S.N.^Ed. Wilkes College:
Southern Illinois University
M.A.. New York Universir}-
STEVE ROBINSON (1979)
ANDRZEJ J. BUCKI
Religion
Mathematics
B.A.. M.A.. Brigham Young Universit}':
B.S. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University
Ph.D.. Duke University
M.S. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University
MICHAEL G. ROSKIN (1972)
JOHN H. CONRAD (1959)
Political Science
Education
A.B.. University of California at Berkeley: M.A..
B.S.. Mansfield Stale College:
Universit}- of California at Los Angeles: Ph.D..
M.A.. New York Universit}-
The American University
SANTHUSHT S. DeSILVA ( 1983)
ROGER D. SHIPLEY (1967)
Mathematics
Art
B.Sc. Universit}- of Sri Lanka:
B.A.. Otterbein College: M.F.A.,
M.A.. Ph.D.. Universit}- of Pittsburgh
Cranbrook Academy of Art
DAVID FISHER
H. BRUCE WEAVER (1974)
Physics
Business Administration
B.S.. The Pennsylvania State Universit}-:
B.B.A.. Stetson University: J. D.. Vanderbilr Universit}-:
M.S.. Ph.D.. Universit}- of Delaware
M.B.A.. Florida Technological University
EDWARD G. GABRIEL ( 1977)
JOHN M. WHELAN. JR. (1971)*
Biology
Philosophy
B.A.. M. A.. Alfred Universit}-:
B.A.. Universit}- of Notre Dame: Ph.D..
M.S.. Ph.D.. The Ohio State Universit}-
The Universit}- of Texas at Austin
ELSAGILMORE(1985)
STANLEY T. WILK (1973)
Spanish
Anthropology
B.A... M.A . . Universit}- of Miami
B.A.. Hunter College: Ph.D.. Universit}- of Pittsburgh
ELSIE M. GOLD
ROBERT A. ZACCARIA (1973)
English
Biology
B.A.. Herbert Lehman College:
B.A.. Bridgewater College:
M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Rochester
Ph.D.. University of Virginia
GEOFFREY L. GORDON (1981)
Business Administration
*On Sabbatical Fall/Spring Semester 1985-86
6.5.. Lehigh Universit}-:
**0n Sabbatical Spring Semester 1985-86
M.B.A.. Duke Universit}-: C.P.LM.
FREDL. GROGAN(1977)
Political Science
ASSISTANT PROFESSORS
Assistant Dean of the College
A.B.. Bates College: M.A.. Arizona State Universit}-:
JERRY D. ALLEN (1984)
Ph.D.. Universit}- of Missouri
Theatre
THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966)
B.F.A.. M.F.A.. Utah State Universit}-
Director of Computer Services; Mathematics
RICHARD J. BARKER (1982)
B.S.. Wake Forest College: M.A.. Universit}- of Kansas
Spanish
OWEN F. HERRING (1965)
B.A.. Hamilton College: M.A.. Universit}- of Iowa:
Philosophy
Ph.D.. Universir}- of Oregon
B.A.. Wake Forest College
SUSAN K. BEIDLER (1975)
JANET HURLBERT (1985)
Collection Management Services Librarian
Instructional Services Librarian
B.A.. Universit}- of Delaware:
B.A.. M.A.. Universit}- of Denver
M.L.S.. Universit}- of Pittsburgh
75
MURIEL K. JACOBY (1984)
RICHARD E. WIENECKE (1982)
Nursing
Accounting
B.S.N.^. Hood College:
A.B., Lycoming College: M.S.. Bucknell Universiiv
M.S., University of Delaware
M.B.A.. Long Lsland University: C.P.A.
GRANT L. JEFFERS (1983)
(Pennsylvania and New York)
Music
FREDRIC M. WILD, JR. (1978)**
B.A.. Williams College;
English
M.M., University of Cincinnati:
B.A., Emory University; M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State
Ph.D.. Universit}' of California. Los Angeles
University-; M.Div., Yale Divinity School
WILLIAM E. KEIG(1980)
MELVIN C. ZIMMERMAN (1979)
Astronomy and Physics
Biology
A.B.. University' of California at Santa Cruz:
B.S., SUNY at Cortkmd:
M.S.. Ph.D., University of Chicago
M.S., Ph.D.. Miami University-
ELDON F. KUHNS, II (1979)
Accounting
**0n Sabbatical Spring Semester 1986
A.B., Lycoming College: M. Accounting.
Universit\- of Oklahoma: C.P.A. (Pennsylvania)
CAROLE MOSES (1982)
INSTRUCTORS
English
B.A., Adelphi University: M.A.. The Pennsylvania
SALLY ANN ATKINSON (1983)
State University-; Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton
Nursing
DORIS P. PARRISH (1983)
B.S.N., Te.uis Woman's University-; M.S.N., University
Nursing
of Texas, Health Science Center at San Antonio
B.S., SUNY at Plattshurgh; M.S., Russell Sage College
CHRIS A. CHERRINGTON (1983)
JUDITH A. POTTMEYER (1984)
Education
Biology
B.S., University of Oklahoma;
B.S.. Clarion State College:
M.Ed., University- of Virginia
Ph.D., Washington State University
DAVID B. HAIR (1979)
KATHRYN M. RYAN (1981)
Physical Education
Psychology
B.S., East Stroudshurg State College
B.S., University of Illinois;
DANIEL HARTSOCK (1982)
M.S., Ph.D.. University- of Pittsburgh
Visiting Instructor in English
GENE D. SPRECHINI (1981)
B.A.. The Pennsylvania State Universiry;
Mathematics
M.A.. Indiana University- of Pennsylvania
B.S., Wilkes College;
DEBORAH J. HOLMES (1976)
M.A., Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton
Physical Education
LARRY R. STRAUSER (1973)
B.S., M.S.. The Pennsylvania State University
Sociology
BRADLEY NASON
A.B.. Lyctmiing College;
Mass Communication
MP. A., Universit\- of Arizona
A.B., Lycoming College; M. A. in Communications,
FRED M. THAYER. JR. (1976)
The American University-
Music
KATHLEEN D. PAGANA (1982)***
A.B., Syracu.w University: B.M.. Ithaca College;
Nursing
M.M., SUNY at Binghamton; DMA..
B.S.N. , University of Maryland;
Cornell University
M.S.N., University of Penn.sylvcmia
EDWARD C. WALLACE (1985)
Mathematics
***On Leave of Absence 1985-86
B.S., Miami University
M.S., Rutgers State University
Ph.D., The University of Texas at Austin
LECTURERS & SPECIAL APPOINTMENTS
BUDDF. WHITEHILL(1957)
Physical Education
NANCY B. COOLEY (1981)
6.5., Lock Haven University- : M.Ed.,
Worksite Health Program Coordinator — CHIP
The Pennsylvania State University
A.B.. Lycoming College
76
BARBARA KEARNEY (1985)
Nursing
B.S.. The Pennsylvania Slate University:
M.S.. Marywood College
DON M. LARRABEE II (1972)
Lecturer in Law
A.B.. Franklin and Marshall College;
LL.B.. Fordham University
GREGORY SZYMANIAK (1984)
Nursing
B.S.. Albany College of Pharmacy: Phorm.D..
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science
JOHN J. TAMALIS (1976)
Chaplain to Roman Catholic Students
B.S.. Universir\' of Scranion: M.S.. Marywood College
PART-TIME FACULTY
MARY P. BAGGETT (1977)
Chemistry
B. A.. Regis College: M.A.. Wellesley College
ADELLE DOTZEL (1981)
Mathematics
B.S.. King's College: M.A..
The Pennsylvania State University
ROME A. HANKS (1982)
Art
B.A.. M.F.A.. The Pennsylvania State University
NANCY WOLF (1985)
Political Science
B.A.. St. Mary's College
MP A.. University of Michigan
APPLIED MUSIC TEACHERS
DONALD FREED (1983)
Violin
B.S.. West Chester State College: M.Ed.,
D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University
GARY GUTH (1983)
Guitar
B.S.. Indiana University of Pennsylvania
RICHARD J. LAKEY (1979)
Organ and Piano
A.B., Westminster Choir College: M.A.,
Indiana University of Penn.nivania
ALBERT NACINOVICH (1972)
Brass
B.A. in Music Education. Mansfield Univer.sity
M.S. in Music Education. Ithaca College
CATHERINE PAYN (1983)
Voice
B.M.. B. Church M.. Westminster Choir College;
M.M., Voice, West Virginia University
MARY RUSSELL (1936)'
Piano
M.B., Susquehanna University : M .A..
The Pennsxlvania State Universitx
ADJUNCT FACULTY & STAFF
BROOKE BARRIE (1984)
Sculpture
Johnson Atelier Technical Institiae of Sculpture
MICHAEL R. J. FELIX (1980)
Director, County Health Improvement Program
B.S.. Cortland University
JAMES WALTER HUFFMAN (1984)
Assistant Technical Director of Arena Theatre
B.A., in Studio Art, B.A., in Theatre,
Bloomshurg University'
JON LASH (1984)
Sculpture
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture
ANDRZEJ PITYNSKl (1984)
Sculpture
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture
ALBERT J. STUNKARD (1980)
Director of institute of Community Health
B.S., Yale University: M.D., Columbia University
HERK VAN TONGEREN (1984)
Sculpture
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture
MEDICAL STAFF
FREDERIC C. LECHNER. M.D.
College Physician
B.S.. Franklin and Marshall College:
M.D.. Jeffer.wn Medical College
ROBERT S. YASUL M.D.
College Surgeon
M.D.. Temple University
EVELYNN L. SEAMAN, R.N.
College Nurse
Williamsport Hospital School of Nursing
MARY J. VESTERMARK (1977)
Counselor
A.B., Oberlin: M.A.. Stetson University:
Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill
77
ATHLETICS STAFF
JANIS ARP Field Hockey Coach
RALPH AUGUSTINE Equipment Manager
CLARENCE W. BURCH Men's Basicetball Coach
ROBERT L. CURRY Assistant Athletic Director
REES DANEKER Assistant Basketball Coach
JOHN ECK Men's Basketball Statistician
DAVID L. FORTIN Assistant Wrestling Coach
ROBERT L. GEORGE Assistant Footbafl Coach
FRANK L. GIRARDI Athletic Director.
Head Football Coach
C. MICHAEL GREEN Assistant Track Coach
DENNIS E. HAMMOND Assistant Football Coach
EUGENE HENDERSCHED Golf Coach
DEBORAH J. HOLMES Women's Tennis Coach
MICHAEL J. HUDOCK Assistant Basketball Coach
TERRY B. MANTLE Assistant Football Coach
JOSEPH G. MARK Men's Tennis Coach
SCOTT R. McLEAN Assistant Football Coach
J. SCOTT McNeill Soccer Coach
ALAN J. MORGAN JV Basketball Coach
JOHN F. PIPER. JR Cross Country Coach
WADE POTTER Assistant Wrestling Coach
KEVIN ROSENSTEEL Assistant Diving Coach
W. PATRICK SCHEMERY Head Track.
Assistant Football Coach
BUDD WHITEHILL Wrestling Coach
DONALD R. WHITFORD. JR Head Trainer
STEVEN R. WISER Assistant Football Coach
ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANTS
Vicki B. Atwood.... Secretary, Office of Student Activities
Katherine F. Baker Accounting Assistant
Rebecca Bastian Data Entry Clerk
Robert E. Bay Grounds Foreman
Emily C. Biichle Coordinator
Facilities Scheduling/Purchasing
Joyce A. Billeck Faculty Secretary
Helen J . Boe Typist/Clerk Admissions
Barbara Bowes Bookstore Assistant
Beth A. Brossman Gift Records Clerk
Debra A. Brown Secretary to Registrar
Pauline Brungard Student Loan Coordinator
IB.S., Lycoming College)
Barbara J. Carlin Secretary to
Director of Admissions
Kathy A. Confair Cashier/Bookkeeper
Richard L. Cowher Press Operator
Elizabeth G. Cowles Career Development Secretary
June V. Creveling Secretary. Buildings & Grounds
Patricia Cundiff Systems Analyst
Mary Dahlgren Admissions Data Entry Assistant
June L. Evans Secretary. Nursing
Robert W. Faus Assistant Press Operator
Mary M. Fleming Research Assistant. CHIP
S. Jean Gair Secretary. Music and Art Department
Imre Gajari, Jr Computer Programmer/Operator
Irene V. Gohrig Secretary to Dean of Student Services
Judith Hart. Secretary, Biology and Chemistry Departments
Diane Hassinger Secretary to Executive
Director of Institutional Advancement
Mary C. Hendricks Supervisor of Housekeeping
Esther L. Henninger Administrative Assistant
for Admissions
Bemadine G. Hileman Office Services Coordinator
Phyllis M. Holmes Secretary to President
Barbara E. Horn Secretary to Athletics Director
Judy Knittle Faculty Secretary
Denise M. Koch Secretary. Athletics Office
Gale D. Laubacher Financial Aid Assistant
Judy F. McConnell Library Assistant/Day
Circulation Supervisor
D. Maxine McCormick Records Clerk and
Secretary to Assistant Dean of the College
Doris F. McCoy Data Entry. Alumni
Glenn E, McCreary Slide Clerk. Art
Nancy L. Morrett CHIP Administrative Assistant
Marilyn Mullings Faculty Secretary
Phyllis B. Myers Secretary to
Director of Alumni Relations
Marion R. Nyman Secretary to Treasurer
Kimberly A. Owen Library Assistant
Rosalie Pfaff Switchboard Operator
David W. Poeth Assistant to Director of
Buildings and Grounds
Pearl Ringler Bookstore Assistant
Sheran L. Swank Faculty Secretary
Patricia J. Triaca Library Assistant
Sharon A. Vedder Computer Programmer/Operator
Deborah E. Weaver Damage Assessment Clerk
Vickie L. Weaver ....Secretary to Director of Financial Aid
Geraldine H. Wescott Periodicals Assistant in Library
Loretta M . Whipkey Secretary to Director of
Public Relations
Donald R. Whitford. Jr Athletic Trainer
Cathleen R. Wild Interim Instructional
Services Librarian
Patricia S. Wittig Secretary. Campus Ministry Center
Madlyn Wonderlich Secretary to Dean of the College
Cheryl A. Yearick Library Assistant/Night
Circulation Supervisor
Gail M. Zimmerman AV/ILL Library Assistant
78
The Alumni Association
The Alumni Association of Lycoming College has a mem-
bership of nearly 1 1 ,000 men and women . It is governed by an
executive board consisting of 24 members-at-large, elected
through mail ballot by the membership of the association. The
board also has members representing specific geographic
areas, the senior class president, the student body president,
and past presidents of the last graduating class and the Student
Association of Lycoming College. The association annually
designates one alumni representative as a nominee for a
three-year term on the College board of trustees. The Director
of Alumni and Parent Relations directs the activities of the
alumni office. The Alumni Association has the following
purpose as stated in its constitution: "As an off-campus
constituency, the association's purpose is to seek ways of
maintaining an active and mutually beneficial relationship
between the College and its alumni, utilizing their talents,
resources and counsel to further the objective and program of
Lycoming College."
All former students of Williamsport Dickinson Seminary
and all former students who have successfully completed one
year of study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior College or
Lycoming College are considered members of the association.
Acting as the representative of alumni on the campus and
working also with undergraduates, the alumni office is respon-
sible for keeping alumni informed and interested in the prog-
rams, growth, and activities of the College through regular
publications mailed to all alumni on record. Arrangements for
Homecoming, class reunions, club meetings, and similar
activities are coordinated through this office. Through the
Lycoming College Fund, the alumni office is closely asso-
ciated with the development program of the College. Commu-
nications to the alumni association should be addressed to the
Office of Alumni and Parent Relations.
1985-86 ALUMNI ASSOCIATION
EXECUTIVE BOARD
Term Expires June 1986
David G. Argall "80 — Deer Trail Lane, Lake Hauto.
R.D. #1, Nesquehoning, PA 18240
David E. Detwiler (Dr.) "75 — 503 East Church St.,
Martinsville, VA 24112
Robert J. Glunk "59 — R.D. #3. Jersey Shore, PA 17740
Donna Michael Heiney (Mrs.) "62 — R.D. #2, Hughes-
ville. PA 17737
Patricia MacBride Krauser (Mrs.) "68 — R.D. #1, Box
10-L, Mt. Wolf, PA 17347
Mary Landon Russell (Mrs.) "33 — 812 Lincoln Avenue,
Williamsport, PA 17701
Susan J. Stamm (Miss) "83 — 776 Providence Rd., Aldan,
PA 19018
Doris Heller Teufel (Mrs.) '54 — R.D. #1, P.O. Box
852, Williamsport, PA 17701
Term Expires June 1987
Steven B. Barth "78 — R.D. #2. Box 378, Danville.
PA 17821
Romain F. Bastian "61 — 500 N. Front Street. Milton, PA
17847
Cindy L. Bell (Miss) '82 — 77 Yarmouth Rd., Rochester,
NY 14610
H. Ridge Canaday, Jr. "66 — 2816 Orchard Ave.. R.D.
#3.^Montoursville, PA 17754
Richard H. Felix "56 — 1230 Pennsylvania Avenue, Wil-
liamsport, PA 17701
Yvonne Smith Kaiser (Mrs.) '64 — 2430 Sheridan Street,
Williamsport, PA 17701
Wayne M. Moffatt '63 — R.D. #2, Box 307B, Montours-
ville, PA 17754
Dorothy Ferrell Sandmeyer (Mrs.) '43 & '63 — 47 E.
Houston Ave.. Montgomery, PA 17752
Term Expires June 1988
Carolyn Moday Edwards (Mrs.) '61 — 1521 Elmira St.,
Williamsport, PA 17701
Robert V. Haas '58 — 2805 Four Mile Dr.. R.D. #3,
Montoursville, PA 17754
Kay Stenger Huffman (Mrs.) '60 — 1315 Lose Avenue,
Williamsport, PA 17701
David L. Phillips (The Rev.) '63 — 590 Lincoln Avenue.
Williamsport. PA 17701
Mary Johnson Smith (Mrs.) '59 — 1439 Grampian Boule-
vard. Williamsport. PA 17701
Otto L. Sonder. Jr. (Dr.) '46 — 52 West Street, Oneonta,
NY 13820
Nancy Flory Spannuth (Mrs.) '64 — 333 Oakley Dr.,
State College, PA 16803
Richard E. Wienecke '66 — 1636 Almond St., Williams-
port, PA 17701
Members of the Board
Serving a One-Year Term
Student Association of Lycoming College (SALC).
President — Kenneth R. Schmidt "86 — Coral Springs,
FL
Senior Class President — Elizabeth J. Barrick '86 —
Belvidere, NJ
1985 Class President — Patricia L. Loomis '85 — R.D.
#1, Box 439, Troy, PA 16947
Immediate Past President of SALC — Patricia A. Ryan
'85 — 828 Mt. Ave., Bound Brook, NJ 08805
Alumni Representatives to
Lycoming College Board of Trustees
1986 — Mary R. Schweikle (Dr.) '63 — 2905 Orchard
Avenue, Montoursville, PA 17754
1987 — Robert W. Edgar (Congressman) '65 — POB
128, Glen Riddle, PA 19037
79
1988 — Seth D. Keller "65 — 137 Lincoln Avenue,
Williamsport. PA 17701
Area Alumni Representalives
Charles J. Kocian "50 — Washington, DC
Ann E. Weitzel "79 — Southcentral Pennsylvania
Kent T. Baldwin "64 — Greater Williamsport
James G. Scott "70 — New England
Patrick J. Cerillo "77 — Northern New Jersey
Kimberly Martin Koehl '78 — Southern New Jersey
Barry C. Hamilton '70 — Greater Philadelphia
1984-85 ALUMNI ASSOCIATION OFFICERS*
President — Robert V. Haas '58 — 2805 Four Mile
Dr., R.D. #3, Montoursville, PA 17754
Vice President for Campus Affairs — Nancy Flory Span-
nuth (Mrs.) '64 — 333 Oakley Dr., State College, PA
16803
Vice-President for Regional Affairs — Donald E. Failor
'68 — 12 Country Club Place, Camp Hill. PA 1701 1
Secretary — Carolyn Moday Edwards (Mrs.) '61 — 1521
Elmira St., Williamsport^ PA 17701
Last Retiring President — Kent T. Baldwin '64 — 929
Grampian Blvd., Williamsport, PA 17701
*OtTicers are elected from among the
Alumni Association Executive Board members.
80
Index
Academic Advisement 8
Academic Calendar 70
Academic Honesty 11
Academic Honors 11
Academic Program 5
Academic Standing 11
Accounting Curriculum 20
Accounting-Mathematics (EIM) 21
Accreditation 4
Administrative Assistants 78
Administrative Staff 72
Admission 62
Admissions Deposit 64
Admissions Office 63
Admission Policy 62
Admission Standards 62
Advanced Placement 11
Advanced Standing by Transfer 62
Advisory Committees 8
Health Professions 8
Legal Professions 9
Medical Technoloy 8
Theological Professions 9
Allopathic Medicine. Advisement for 9
American Studies (EIM) 22
Anthropology Curricululm 56
Application Fee and Deposits 64
Application Process 62
Applied Music Requirements 48
Art Curriculum 23
Astronomy and Physics Curriculum .25
Athletics Training 52
Attendance, Class 11
Audit 15
Awards 12
BFA Degree 5
Biology Curriculum 27
Board of Trustees 71
Books and Supplies 64
BSN Degree 5
Business Administration Curriculum 29
Calendar, Academic 70
Campus Facilities 68
Capitol Semester 17
Career Development Services 60
Chemistry Curriculum 30
Christian Ministry. Advisement for.. 9
Class Attendance 11
College and the Church 4
College Directory 71
College Level Examination Program
(CLEP) 11
Community Scholarships 67
Computer Science Curriculum 44
Conduct. Standards of 61
Contents 2
Contingency Deposits 64
Cooperative Programs 15
Engineering 15
Environmental Studies 16
Forestry 16
Medical Technology 16
Military Science 17
Optometry 16
Podiatric Medicine 17
Sculpture 17
Counseling. Academic 8
Counseling. Personal 60
Course Credit by Examination 11
Course Descriptions 21
Criminal Justice (EIM) 32
Curriculum 21
Damage Charges 60
Degree Programs 5
Degree Requirements 5
Dental School. Advisement for 8
Departmental Honors 13
Departmental Majors 7
Deposits 64
Deposit Refunds 64
Distribution Requirements 6
English 6
Fine Arts 6
Foreign Language 6
History and Social Science 6
Mathematics 6
Natural Science 6
Philosophy 6
Religion 6
Early Admission Procedure 62
Economics Curriculum 35
Education Curriculum 34
Education Financing Plans 67
Educational Opportunity Grants 66
Engineering. Cooperative Program ..15
English Curriculum 32
English Requirement 6
Entrance Examinations (CEEB) 11
Entry Fees and Deposits 64
Environmental Studies 16
Established Interdisciplinary Major
(EIM) 7
Expenses 64
Faculty 73
Federal Grants and Loans 66
Fees 64
Financial Aid 65
Financial Assistance 65
Financial Information 65
Fine Arts Requirements 6
Foreign Language Requirement 6
foreign Languages and
Literatures Curriculum 36
Forestry. Cooperative Program 16
French Curriculum 37
General Expenses 64
German Curriculum 38
Grading System 10
Graduation Requirements 5
Grants-in- Aid 66
Greek Curriculum 38
Health Professions Careers 8
Health Services 61
Hebrew Curriculum 38
History Curriculum 39
History of the College 4
History Requirements 6
Honor Societies 12
Honors. Academic 12
Honors, Departmental 13
Independent Study 14
Interdisciplinary Majors 7
Established Majors (EIM) ,. 7
Individual Majors (IIM) 7
International Studies 42
Internship Programs 14
Interviews 62
Johnson Atelier 23
Legal Professions, Advisement for .. 9
Literature (EIM ) 43
Loans 66
Location 4
London Semester 17
Major 7
Admission to 7
Departmental 7
Interdisciplinary (EIM. IIM) 7
Mass Communication (EIM) 43
Mathematical Sciences 44
Mathematics Requirements 6
May Term 15
Medical School. Advisement for 8
Medical History 62
Medical Staff 61
Medical Technology 16
Military Science 17
Ministerial Grants-in-Aid 65
Minor 8
Music Curriculum 47
National Direct Student Loans
(NDSL) 66
Natural Science Requirement 6
Near East Culture and Archaeology
(EIM) 48
Non-Payment of Fees Penalty 65
81
Nursing 48
Optometry 16
Optomerty School, Advisement for.. 8
Osteopathy School. Advisement for. 8
Overseas Studies Opportunities 15
Part-time Student Opportunities 15
Payment of Fees 64
Payments, Partial 64
Penalty for Non-Payment of Fees ....65
Personal Counseling 60
Philadelphia Semester 18
Philosophy Curriculum 50
Philosophy Requirement 6
Physical Education Curriculum 52
Physics Curriculum 26
Placement Services 60
Podiatric Medicine, Cooperative
Program 17
Political Science Curriculum 52
Psychology Curriculum 53
Purpose and Objectives 3
Reading Improvement Course 61
Refunds 64
Registration 9
Regulations (Standards of Conduct) .61
Religion Curriculum 54
Religion Requirement 6
Repeated Courses 10
Requirements, Distribution 6
Requirements for Admission 62
Requirements for Graduation 5
Reserve Officer Training Corps
Program (ROTC) 17
Residence 60
Residence Halls 60
Scholarships 65
Scholarships (ROTC) 67
Scholar Program 18
Sculpture 23
Selection Process 62
Social Science Requirement 6
Sociology-Anthropology Curriculum 56
Spanish Curriculum 38
Special Features 14
Independent Study 14
Internship Program 14
May Term 15
Overseas Studies Opportunities 15
Standards of Admission 62
Standards of Conduct 61
State Grants and Loans 66
Student Enrichment Semester (SES).17
Student Records 1 1
Student Services 60
Study Abroad 15
Summer Session Calendar 70
Supplemental Educational Opportunity
Grant (SEOG) 66
Theatre Curriculum 58
Theological Professions,
Advisement 9
Transfer 62
Trustees 71
Unit Course System 9
United Nations Semester 17
Veterans, Approval 62
Veterinary School, Advisement for.. 8
Washington Semester 17
Withdrawal from College 64
Work-Study Grants 66
82
'MS;-